Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Baby Lock Elegante2 BLG2 Sewing Machine Instruction Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 268

English

882-S95
XE2542-001
Printed in Taiwan
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When using this machine, basic safety precautions should always be taken, including the following:
Read all instructions before using.

DANGER - To reduce the risk of electric shock:


1. The machine should never be left unattended while plugged in. Always unplug the machine from the electrical
outlet immediately after using and before cleaning.

WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock, or injury to persons:
1. Do not allow this machine to be used as a toy. Close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or
near children.
2. Use this machine only for its intended use as described in this manual. Use only accessories recommended by
the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
3. Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been dropped
or damaged, or dropped into water. Return the machine to the nearest authorized retailer or service center for
examination, repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
4. Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine and foot
control free from the accumulation of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
5. Never drop or insert any object into any opening.
6. Do not use outdoors.
7. Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.

8. To disconnect, turn the main switch to the symbol “ ” position which represents off, then remove plug from
outlet.
9. Do not unplug by pulling on cord. To unplug, grasp the plug, not the cord.
10. Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
11. Always use the proper needle plate. The wrong plate can cause the needle to break.
12. Do not use bent needles.
13. Do not pull or push fabric while stitching. It may deflect the needle causing it to break.

14. Switch the machine to the symbol “ ” position when making any adjustments in the needle area.
15. Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when removing covers, lubricating, or when making any
other user servicing adjustments mentioned in the instruction manual.
16. This sewing machine is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.
17. Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with this machine.
18. If the LED light unit (light-emitting diode) is damaged, it must be replaced by authorized retailer.
19. Hold the foot controller plug when rewinding into cord reel. Do not allow the plug to whip when rewinding.
20. When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you
may injure your back or knees.
21. When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any
other part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS


This machine is intended for household use.

i
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA
AND CYPRUS ONLY
If this machine is fitted with a three-pin non-rewireable BS plug then please read the following.

IMPORTANT
If the available socket outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, it should be cut off and an
appropriate three-pin plug fitted. With alternative plugs an approved fuse must be fitted in the plug.

NOTE
The plug served from the main lead must be destroyed as a plug with bared flexible cords is hazardous if engaged in
a live socket outlet. In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying
the mark, rating as marked on plug.
Always replace the fuse cover, never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.

WARNING
DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE LETTER ‘E’, BY
THE EARTH SYMBOL OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN AND YELLOW.

The wires in this main lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue Neutral

Brown Live

As the colours of the wiring in the main lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.

The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter ‘N’ or coloured
black or blue.

The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter ‘L’ or coloured
red or brown.

ii
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Declaration of Conformity (For USA Only)
Responsible Party: Tacony Corporation
1760 Gilsinn Lane,
Fenton, Missouri 63026

declares that the product


Product Name: Baby Lock Sewing Machine
Model Number: BLG2-NZ/BLG2

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the retailer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The enclosed interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class
B digital device.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tacony Corporation could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.

iii
CONGRATULATIONS ON CHOOSING OUR
MACHINE
Your machine is the most advanced computerized household embroidery and sewing machine. To fully enjoy all
the features incorporated, we suggest that you study the manual.

PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS MACHINE


For safe operation
1. Be sure to keep your eye on the needle while sewing. Do not touch the handwheel, thread take-up, needle, or
other moving parts.
2. Remember to turn off the power switch and unplug the cord when:
• Operation is completed
• Replacing or removing the needle or any other parts
• A power failure occurs during use
• Maintaining the machine
• Leaving the machine unattended.
3. Do not store anything on the foot controller.
4. Plug the machine directly into the wall. Do not use extension cords.
5. Do not place or store the machine near heaters or other hot appliances, in any location exposed to extremely
high or low temperatures, high humidity or dusty locations. Doing so could cause the machine to malfunction.
6. Never operate the machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been dropped
or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized retailer or service
center for examination, repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
7. The sewing machine plastic bag should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed of. Never allow
children to play with plastic bags due to the danger of suffocation.
8. Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table; otherwise the
sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.

For a longer service life


1. When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
2. Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage
the case and machine, and should never be used.
3. Do not drop or hit the machine.
4. Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or
other parts to assure correct installation.
5. Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.

For repair or adjustment


In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of the
operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your local
authorized Baby Lock retailer.

For additional product information and updates, visit our web site at www.babylock.com

The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

iv
v
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

SPECIAL FEATURES

Check operations and view advice on the large LCD (liquid crystal display).

Prepare the bobbin thread with one touch.

The automatic thread tension makes trial sewing unnecessary.

Automatic threading makes threading quick and easy.

Getting Ready Sewing Basics


To learn the operation of the principal To learn how to prepare for sewing and
parts and the screens basic sewing operations

Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Page 9 Page 43

Utility Stitches Character/Decorative


Pre-programmed with more than
100 frequently used stitches
Stitches
The variety of stitches widen your creativity

Chapter 3 Chapter 4
Page 57 Page 115

Embroidery Embroidery Edit


Maximum 30 cm x 18 cm (approx. 12 x 7 Designs can be combined, rotated or enlarged
inches) for large embroidery designs

Chapter 5 Chapter 6
Page 143 Page 197

Appendix
Caring for your machine and dealing with
errors and malfunctions

Chapter 7
Page 225

vi
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 explain your sewing machine’s basic operation procedures for someone who is
using the sewing machine for the first time. If you want to sew utility stitches or character/ decorative
stitches, read Chapter 1 and Chapter 2, then go on to Chapter 3 (Utility Stitches) or Chapter 4 (Character/
Decorative Stitches).
When you are ready to begin using the embroidery function after reading Chapter 1 and Chapter 2,
proceed to Chapter 5 (Embroidery). Once you understand the steps explained in Chapter 5, go on to
Chapter 6 (Embroidery Edit) for an explanation about the convenient embroidery edit functions.
In the screens that appear in the step-by-step directions the parts that are used for the operation are shown
in . Compare the screen in the directions with the actual screen, and carry out the operation.
If, while using the machine, you experience something you do not understand, or there is a function you
would like to know more about, refer to the index at the back of the operation manual in conjunction
with the table of contents to find the section of the manual you should refer to.

Chapter 3

Chapter 1 Chapter 2
To sew utility stitches
To sew character or
decorative stitches
Chapter 4

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 5 Chapter 6


To do machine
embroidery

vii
Contents

CONTENTS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..................i Using the Sewing Type Selection Key ...................................61
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA SEWING THE STITCHES ..................................... 63
AND CYPRUS ONLY .............................................................. ii Straight Stitches .....................................................................63
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Dart Seam .............................................................................67
Conformity (For USA Only) .................................................... iii Gathering ..............................................................................68
CONGRATULATIONS ON CHOOSING OUR MACHINE ..... iv Flat Fell Seam ........................................................................69
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE .....vi Pintuck ..................................................................................69
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................vii Zigzag Stitches ......................................................................71
Elastic Zigzag Stitches ...........................................................73
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS Overcasting ...........................................................................74
AND THEIR FUNCTIONS....................................... 1 Quilting.................................................................................79
Machine ................................................................................. 1 Blind Hem Stitches ................................................................89
Needle and Presser Foot Section ............................................. 2 Appliqué ...............................................................................90
Embroidery Unit ..................................................................... 3 Shelltuck Stitches ..................................................................91
Operation Buttons................................................................... 3 Scallop Stitches .....................................................................92
Included Accessories .............................................................. 4 Top Stitching .........................................................................92
Options................................................................................... 7 Smocking Stitches .................................................................93
Removing the LCD cover ........................................................ 7 Fagoting ................................................................................93
Attaching the LCD cover ......................................................... 8 Tape or Elastic Attaching .......................................................94
Heirloom...............................................................................95
Chapter 1 Getting Ready 9 One-step Buttonholes ............................................................97
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF ...................10 Four-step Buttonholes..........................................................101
Bar Tacks ............................................................................105
LCD SCREEN .......................................................11 Button Sewing .....................................................................107
Screens Operations Performed Using a USB Mouse .............. 14
Eyelet ..................................................................................109
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key .................................. 16
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) .110
Using the Machine Operation Mode Key .............................. 21
Zipper Insertion ...................................................................111
Using the Pattern Explanation Key ........................................ 22
LOWER THREADING..........................................23 Chapter 4 Character/Decorative Stitches 115
Winding the Bobbin.............................................................. 23
Setting the Bobbin................................................................. 26 SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ........................ 116
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread............................................... 28 Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative
UPPER THREADING ...........................................29 Stitch Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns/Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .........118
Threading Using the “Automatic Threading” Button.............. 29
Alphabet Characters ............................................................118
Threading Manually .............................................................. 31
Using the Twin Needle Mode ............................................... 34 SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ............................ 120
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly ..................................... 36 Sewing Attractive Finishes ...................................................120
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT .......................37 Basic Sewing .......................................................................120
Making Adjustments ............................................................121
Removing the Presser Foot .................................................... 37
Attaching the Presser Foot ..................................................... 37 EDITING STITCH PATTERNS............................ 123
Attaching the Walking Foot................................................... 38 Changing the Size ...............................................................124
CHANGING THE NEEDLE...................................39 Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ...125
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image .........................................125
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .....................................125
Chapter 2 Sewing Basics 43 Sewing a Pattern Continuously ............................................125
SEWING ..............................................................44 Changing Thread Density
Sewing a Stitch ..................................................................... 44 (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) .............................................126
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ............................................. 46 Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern ............................126
Sewing Curves ...................................................................... 46 Checking the Image.............................................................127
Changing Sewing Direction .................................................. 46 COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS..................... 128
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ................................................ 47 Before Combining ...............................................................128
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ................................................... 48 Combining Various Stitch Patterns.......................................128
Sewing Stretch Fabrics .......................................................... 48 Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns..........................130
STITCH SETTINGS...............................................49 Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns.............130
Setting the Stitch Width......................................................... 49 Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .....................131
Setting the Stitch Length ........................................................ 49 Making Step Stitch Patterns
Setting the Thread Tension .................................................... 50 (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ....................................132
USEFUL FUNCTIONS..........................................51 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION .................. 134
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ....................................... 51 Stitch Data Precautions .......................................................134
Automatic Thread Cutting ..................................................... 52 Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory..................136
Pivoting ................................................................................ 53 Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot (Commercially Available) ....................................................138
Pressure) ............................................................................... 55 Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer ................................139
Locking the Screen................................................................ 55 Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ........140
Recalling from USB Media ..................................................141
Chapter 3 Utility Stitches 57 Recalling from the Computer...............................................142
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES...........................58
Selecting a Stitch................................................................... 59
Saving Your Stitch Settings .................................................... 60

viii
Contents

Chapter 5 Embroidery 143 EDITING PATTERNS ......................................... 203


Moving the Pattern ............................................................. 205
BEFORE EMBROIDERING .................................144 Rotating the Pattern ............................................................ 205
Embroidery Step by Step......................................................144
Changing the Size of the Pattern ......................................... 206
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W” ..........................................145
Deleting the Pattern ............................................................ 207
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ............................................146
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character
SELECTING PATTERNS......................................149
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Floral alphabet Patterns/
Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs ............................151
Patterns............................................................................... 207
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing................................ 207 1
Reducing Character Spacing ............................................... 208
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns .................................152 Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character
Selecting Frame Patterns......................................................153 in a Pattern ......................................................................... 209
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards ...........................154 Changing the Thread Color................................................. 209
Selecting Patterns from USB media/Computer .....................154 Creating a Custom Thread Table......................................... 210
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN ......................155
PREPARING THE FABRIC ..................................157
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table................ 212
Designing Repeated Patterns............................................... 213 2
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (backing) to the Fabric ............157 After Editing........................................................................ 217
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ......................158 COMBINING PATTERNS .................................. 219
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ........................160 Editing Combined Patterns.................................................. 219
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME..........162 Sewing Combined Patterns ................................................. 222
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION .........163 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION .................. 223
Checking the Pattern Position..............................................163
Chapter 7 Appendix 225
3
Previewing the Completed Pattern.......................................164
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN ..............165 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ............................. 226
Sewing Attractive Finishes ...................................................165 Cleaning the LCD Screen.................................................... 226
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ................................................166 Cleaning the Machine Casing ............................................. 226
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué...............168 Cleaning the Race............................................................... 226
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS ...........................................................170
Cleaning the Bobbin Case................................................... 227
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ................................ 228
4
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ........................................170 Screen Visibility is Low ....................................................... 228
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing................................................ 171 Touch Panel is Malfunctioning ........................................... 228
Restarting from the Beginning..............................................171 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 230
Automatically Resuming Embroidery ERROR MESSAGES............................................ 233
When the Power Goes Off ..................................................172
Manually Resuming Embroidery
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................. 239
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S
5
After Turning Off the Power ................................................173
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS ..........174 SOFTWARE ....................................................... 240
Adjusting Thread Tension....................................................174 Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ................................ 240
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function Upgrade Procedure Using Computer .................................. 241
(END COLOR TRIM) ...........................................................175 STITCH SETTING CHART ................................. 243
Using the Thread Trimming Function
(JUMP STITCH TRIM) ..........................................................175
INDEX............................................................... 250 6
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed..........................................176
Changing the Thread Color Display.....................................177
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display.............................178
REVISING THE PATTERN ..................................179
Changing the Pattern Position..............................................179
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ....................................180
Changing the Size ...............................................................181
7
Rotating the Pattern .............................................................182
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .....................................183
Changing the Density
(Alphabet Character and Frame Patterns Only) ....................183
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns............184
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION...................185
Embroidery Data Precautions ..............................................185
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ........187
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media
(Commercially Available) ....................................................189
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer .......................190
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory..................191
Recalling from USB Media ..................................................191
Recalling from the Computer...............................................192
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS..........................194
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1)...................194
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2)...................195

Chapter 6 Embroidery Edit 197


EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS ......................198
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT .......................199
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/
Frame Patterns/Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs ....200
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns .................................200

ix
Contents

x
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS


The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before
using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.

Machine
■ Front View ■ Right-side/Rear View

m
n o

i
c j
b k

h p

d e f
g
a Top cover a Handle
Open the top cover to thread the machine and wind the bobbin. Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the
b Thread cutter machine.
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them. b Handwheel
c Thread take-up lever check window Turn the handwheel toward you to raise and lower the needle.
Look through the window to check the upper thread passing The wheel should be turned toward the front of the machine.
through the thread take-up lever. c Embroidery card slot
d Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment Insert the embroidery cards (sold separately) into the
Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment embroidery card slot.
of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces, d USB port connector for media
remove the flat bed attachment. In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB
e Operation buttons (6 buttons) and sewing speed media directly into the USB port connector.
controller e USB port connector for computer
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing machine. In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the
f Knee lifter slot machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port connector.
Insert the knee lifter into the slot. f Touch pen holder
g Knee lifter Use the touch pen holder to hold the touch pen when not in use.
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot. g Main power switch
h LCD (liquid crystal display) Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and
OFF.
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in
the LCD. h Power cord receptacle
i Thread guide plate Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle.
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading i Feed dog position switch
upper thread. Use the feed dog position switch to lower the feed dogs.
j Spool cap j Presser foot lever
Use the spool cap to hold the spool in place. Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
k Spool pin presser foot.
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. k Air vent
l Bobbin winder The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate. Do
not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being used.
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin.
l Foot controller with retractable cord
m Supplemental spool pin Depress the foot controller to control the speed of the machine.
Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the
twin needle. m Foot controller jack
n Thread guide for bobbin winding Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the machine.
Pass the thread around this thread guide when winding the
bobbin thread.
o Pretension disk
Pass the thread around the pretension disk when winding the
bobbin thread.
p LCD cover
Attach the cover when not using the machine.

1
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Needle and Presser Foot Section


Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover
and needle plate cover
The measurements on the bobbin cover are
references for patterns with a middle (center)
e
f needle position. The measurements on the needle
plate and the needle plate cover are references for
i
g stitches with a left needle position.
a
b

b h
c

j d d

c e
a Presser foot holder
The presser foot is attached onto the presser foot holder.
b Presser foot f
The presser foot applies pressure consistently on the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch. ba
c Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction. a For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
d Bobbin cover b For stitches with a left needle position
Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin.
c Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
e Needle clamp screw
Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place. d Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
f Buttonhole lever e Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover
The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot <inch>
to create buttonholes. f Left needle position on the needle plate cover <inch>
g Needle bar thread guides
Pass the upper thread through the two needle bar thread
guides.
h Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight
seams.
i Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot
holder in place.
j Needle plate cover
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race.

2
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Embroidery Unit Operation Buttons

d
e
f

b
a

a Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering.
b Release button (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit.
c Feed dog position switch
Use the feed dog position switch to raise and lower the feed a “Start/Stop” button
dogs while the embroidery unit is attached.
d Embroidery unit connection Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a
slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the
when attaching the embroidery unit. machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest
e Embroidery frame holder speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder to operation mode.
hold the frame in place.
f Frame-securing lever Green: the machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery Red: the machine cannot sew.
frame.
b “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
CAUTION Use this button to sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning
and end of sewing. Press this button, and the machine sews 3
stitches in the same spot and stops automatically. For straight
• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame and zigzag stitch patterns that take reverse stitches, the
holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is machine will sew reverse stitches at low speed only while
holding down the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (the
correctly lowered. stitches are sewn in the opposite direction).
c “Needle Position” button
Note Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed
sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the
• Be sure that the feed dog position switch on needle position. Press the button twice to sew a single stitch.
the embroidery unit is located at right when
embroidering. d “Thread Cutter” button
Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches thread.
with the embroidery unit attached. Set the
e “Presser Foot Lifter” button
feed dog position switch on the embroidery
unit to the appropriate setting. Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure to
the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
f Sewing Speed controller
Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide to
the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right to
sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow speed.
g “Automatic Threading” button
Use this button to automatically thread the needle.

CAUTION
• Do not press the thread cutter button after the
threads have already been cut. Otherwise, the
needle may break, the threads may become
tangled, or damage to the machine may occur.

3
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Included Accessories 35-38 are contained in the


Included Accessories embroidery unit carrying case. To open the
embroidery unit carrying case, raise the lock and
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the move the latch out of position. To re-hook the
accessory compartment. latches and securely close the case, position the
latch on the catch of the unit lid and lower the
lock till it snaps.

c
a

b
a Lock
b Latch
c Catch
c

a Storage space
b Presser foot storage space
c Presser foot storage space

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14* 15*

4
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

16* 17 18 19 20 21 22

75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles:
Ball point needle (gold colored)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

47 48 49 50 51 52 53

54 55 56 57

* See Additional Accessories Guide for presser foot instruction.


**Included Accessories 35-38 are contained in the embroidery unit carrying case.

5
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

No. Part Name Part Code No. Part Name Part Code
1 Buttonhole foot “A” X57789-151 51 Additional accessories guide BLG2-NZ: XE2639-001
BLG2: XE2554-001
2 Embroidery foot “W” XC8156-451
52 Embroidery unit carrying XC8150-051
3 Overcasting foot “G” XC3098-051 case
4 Monogramming foot “N” X53840-351 53 Hard case XC7750-053
5 Zipper foot “I” X59370-051 54 LCD cover XC8468-051
6 Zigzag foot “J” (on machine) XC3021-051 55 Bobbin center pin XC8661-051
7 Blind stitch foot “R” X56409-051 56 Bobbin cover XE0756-001
8 Button fitting foot “M” 130489-001 57 Power cord XC6052-051
9 Walking foot X59816-104
* See Additional Accessories Guide for presser foot instruc-
10 Free-motion quilting foot “C” XE0765-001
tion.
11 Free-motion open toe quilting XE0767-001
foot “O”
12 Free-motion echo quilting foot XE0766-001 Memo
“E” (For U.S.A. only)
13 Straight stitch foot XD0826-051 Foot controller: Model S
14 Blind stitch foot (with guide)* XA0059-001
This foot controller can be used with this
15 Narrow hemmer foot* 184600-001
machine models: BLG2-NZ/BLG2.
16 Cording foot (3 cord guide)* XA6871-001
17 Seam ripper X54243-001
18 Bobbin × 10 X52860-150 Memo
19 Needle set X58358-051 • Always use accessories recommended for
20 Twin needle X59296-151 this machine.
21 Ball point needle set XD0705-051 • The screw of the presser foot holder is
22 Scissors 184783-051 available through your authorized retailer
23 Chalk pen 184944-001 (Part code XA4813-051).
24 Cleaning brush X59476-051 • Included accessories 39, 49, 50 and 51 can
25 Eyelet punch 135793-001 be stored in the machine’s hard case.
26 Screwdriver (large) X55467-051
27 Screwdriver (small) X55468-051
28 Spool cap (small) 130013-154
29 Spool cap (medium) × 2 X55260-153
30 Spool cap (large) 130012-054
31 Vertical spool pin XC8619-051
32 Spool felt X57045-051
33 Disc-shaped screwdriver XC1074-051
34 Spool net XA5523-050
35 Embroidery frame set (small) EF73: Frame
H 2 cm × W 6 cm EF77: Embroidery sheet
(H 1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
36 Embroidery frame set EF74: Frame
(medium) H 10 cm × W 10 cm EF78: Embroidery sheet
(H 4 inches × W 4 inches)
37 Embroidery frame set (large) EF75: Frame
H 18 cm × W 13 cm EF79: Embroidery sheet
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
38 Embroidery frame set (extra EF76: Frame
large) H 30 cm × W 18 cm EF80: Embroidery sheet
(H 12 inches × W 7 inches)
39 Foot controller XC8028-051
40 Embroidery needle plate XA9939-051
cover
41 Touch pen (stylus) XA9940-051
42 Knee lifter XA6941-051
43 USB cable XD0745-051
44 Alternate bobbin case (pink XC8167-251
screw)
45 Straight stitch needle plate XC8362-051
46 Cord guide bobbin cover (with XC8449-051
single hole)
47 Embroidery bobbin thread BBT-W
48 Stabilizer material X81176-001
49 Instruction and reference BLG2-NZ: XE2638-001
guide BLG2: XE2542-001
50 Quick reference guide BLG2-NZ: XE2640-001
BLG2: XE2543-001

6
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Options Removing the LCD cover

a
1 2 3 While pressing down on the latch at the top
of the LCD cover, pull the cover towards
you.

4 5 6

a Latch
7 8 9

b
Remove the LCD cover.

No. Part Name Part Code


1 Side cutter foot XC3923-001
2 Seam guide BLG-SG
3 1/4” quilting foot with guide XC6800-251
4 Embroidery bobbin thread BBT-W
(White)
Embroidery bobbin thread
(Black) BBT-B

5 Table and free motion grip BLG-ET


6 Embroidery card
7 Spool stand BLG-TS
8 Embroidery frame set (extra
large) H 26 cm x W 16 cm EF81: Frame
(10 – 1/4 inches (H) x EF86: Embroidery sheet
6 – 1/4 inches (W))
9 2-thread spool stand BLG-STS

Memo
• All specifications are correct at the time of
printing.
Please be aware that some specifications
may change without notice.

Note
• Embroidery cards purchased in foreign
countries may not work with your machine.
• Use Baby Lock embroidery cards with your
machine. Please see your retailer for
availability of additional embroidery cards.
• Visit your Baby Lock retailer for a complete
listing of optional accessories available for
your machine, or visit the Baby Lock web
site at www. babylock. com.

7
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

Attaching the LCD cover

a
Insert the tabs at the bottom of the LCD
cover into the grooves at the bottom of the
LCD.

a Tabs
b Grooves

b
While pressing the latch at the top of the
LCD cover, insert the tabs at the top of the
LCD cover into the grooves at the top of the
LCD.

a Latch
b Tabs

8
1
Chapter 1
Getting Ready

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF....................................................10

LCD SCREEN........................................................................................11
■ Key Functions ..................................................................................................................12
Screens Operations Performed Using a USB Mouse................................................14
■ Clicking a key ..................................................................................................................14
■ Changing pages ...............................................................................................................15
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key......................................................................16
■ Adjusting Screen Brightness ............................................................................................19
■ Choosing the Display Language.......................................................................................20
Using the Machine Operation Mode Key ................................................................21
Using the Pattern Explanation Key ..........................................................................22
LOWER THREADING ..........................................................................23
Winding the Bobbin ................................................................................................23
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin...................................................................................23
■ Using the Spool Pin .........................................................................................................25
Setting the Bobbin ...................................................................................................26
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread ................................................................................. 28
UPPER THREADING............................................................................29
Threading Using the “Automatic Threading” Button...............................................29
Threading Manually ................................................................................................31
Using the Twin Needle Mode..................................................................................34
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .......................................................................36
■ Using the Spool Net ........................................................................................................36
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin............................................................................................36

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT .......................................................37


Removing the Presser Foot ......................................................................................37
Attaching the Presser Foot ......................................................................................37
Attaching the Walking Foot.....................................................................................38
CHANGING THE NEEDLE ...................................................................39
■ About the Needle ............................................................................................................41
■ Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations ..............................................................................41
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity as the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms

CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
retailer for repairs before continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may result.
• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.
• When servicing the machine or when removing covers either the machine or the electrical set must be unplugged.
• For U.S.A. only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.

a b
Insert the power cord into the power cord Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
receptacle, then insert the plug into a wall on the machine.
outlet.
b
a

a
a OFF
b ON

c
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn
b off the machine.
a Main power switch
b Power cord

10
LCD SCREEN

LCD SCREEN
When switching on the machine, the screen will display the name of the machine. Touch the screen to
display the utility stitch. Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is selected,
depending on the setting selected in the setting screen (see page 16). 1
Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an
operation indicated on the key.

Getting Ready
Note
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on the machine, the needle will automatically move to the
middle position.

Memo
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the included touch pen. Do not use a sharp pencil,
screwdriver, or other hard or sharp object. It is not necessary to press hard on the screen. Pressing too
hard or using a sharp object may damage the screen.

a
b
c

e
d

a Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position.

Single needle/down position Single needle/up position

Twin needle/down position Twin needle/up position


b Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this display before sewing.
c Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch.
d Shows a preview of the selected stitch.
e Shows the stitch patterns.
f Shows additional pages that can be displayed.
* All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “key functions” table on the following page.

11
LCD SCREEN

■ Key Functions
b c d
a
e
f g

h
i
j
l m
n o
p q
r
s t

u v
w
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Utility stitch key Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem 59
stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.

b Character/Decorative Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns. 116
stitch key

c Embroidery key Attach the embroidery unit and press this key to sew embroidery. 149

d Embroidery edit key Press this key to combine embroidery patterns. With the embroidery edit 199
functions, you can also create original embroidery patterns or frame patterns.

e Free-motion mode key Press this key to enter free-motion sewing mode. 83
The presser foot is raised to a height appropriate for free-motion quilting.

f Sewing type selection Press this key when you need help selecting the appropriate stitch pattern for 61
key the sewing application and when you need instructions on how to sew the stitch
pattern. This key is very helpful for beginners.

g Pattern explanation Press this key to see an explanation of the selected pattern. 22
key

h Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot setting. When the pivot setting is selected, 53
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.

• If this key appears as , it cannot be used.

• Be sure the needle position on page 2 of Machine Settings is set in the down
position.

12
LCD SCREEN

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page


i Automatic Press this key to use the automatic reinforcement stitching (reverse stitching) 51
reinforcement stitch setting. If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically
key sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on
the pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches).

1
j Automatic thread Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic 52
cutting key thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after

Getting Ready
sewing.
k Stitch selection 58
display Press the key of the pattern you want to sew. Use to
change selection screens.

l Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen.When the screen is locked, the various 55
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.

m Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. 59

n Mirror image key Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key 59
display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be
sewn.

o Needle mode Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes 34
selection key (single/ between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the
double) key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn in
twin needle mode.
p Reset key Press this key to return the selected stitch pattern saved settings to the original 49-50
settings.

q Retrieve key Press this key to retrieve a saved pattern. 61

r Manual memory key Change the stitch pattern settings (zigzag width and stitch length, thread 60
tension, automatic thread cutting or automatic reinforcement stitching, etc.),
then save them by pressing this key. Five sets of settings can be saved for a
single stitch pattern.
s Stitch width and stitch Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected stitch 49
length key pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width and
stitch length settings.
t Thread tension key Shows the thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch pattern. The 50
thread tension is usually set automatically. You can use the plus and minus keys
to change the thread tension settings.
u Machine setting mode Press this key to change the needle stop position, turn the buzzer ON/OFF, 16
key adjust the pattern or screen, and change other machine settings.

v Machine operation Press this key to see explanations for upper threading, winding the bobbin, 21
mode key changing the presser foot, and how to use the machine.

w Presser foot/Needle Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot, etc. This key locks 37-40
exchange key or unlocks all key and button functions to prevent operation of the machine.

13
LCD SCREEN

■ Clicking a key
Screens Operations Performed When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears
Using a USB Mouse in the screen. Move the mouse to position the
pointer over the desired key, and then click the left
mouse button.
If a USB mouse (sold separately by computer
retailers) is connected to the sewing machine, the
mouse can be used to perform operations in the Memo
screens. • Double-clicking has no effect.
In addition, a USB hub can be connected so that
USB media and a USB mouse can be used at the
same time.

1
a Pointer

2
4

a USB port connector for media


b USB mouse
c USB hub
d USB media

Note
• Some mouse types cannot be used to
operate the machine. For details on the USB
mouse types that are compatible, check
www.babylock.com.
• Do not perform operations with the mouse
while also touching the screen with your
finger or the included touch pen.
• A USB mouse and USB hub can be
connected or disconnected at any time.
• Only the left mouse button and its wheel can
be used to perform operations. No other
buttons can be used.
• Do not insert two or more USB media into a
USB hub. Only one USB media can be
recognized.

14
LCD SCREEN

■ Changing pages
Rotate the mouse wheel to switch through the tabs
of the pattern selection screens.

Memo
• If for additional pages is displayed, 1
rotate the mouse wheel to display the next

Getting Ready
page. In the or , click the

left mouse button with the pointer on or

to move down to the next part of a


page.

15
LCD SCREEN

Using the Machine Setting Mode Key

Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening

display, etc.) Press , or to display the different settings screens.

Memo
• Some of these functions will be available in future technology upgrades.

• Press or to display a different settings screen.

Sewing settings

c
d
e

f
g
h

a Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page 82).
b Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page 121).
c Adjust the presser foot height. (Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.)
d Adjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at 3 for
normal sewing.)
e Change the initial position of the needle when utility stitch is selected. (Choose left or middle position).
f Change the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page 53).
Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm).
g Change the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free-motion sewing mode (see page 83).
h When set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing, so the
fabric can be fed smoothly (see pages 47 and 55).

16
LCD SCREEN

General settings

Getting Ready
a

b
c

e
f h

g i
j

a Change the brightness of the LCD (see page 19).


b Select the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down.
Select the down position when using the pivot key.
c Turn the buzzer ON/OFF.
d Turn the Needle Area and Work Area Lights ON/OFF.
e Turn the opening screen display ON/OFF.
f Use when running an application.
g Change the display language (see page 20).
h Display the service count of embroidery stitches. The service count is a reminder to take your machine in for regular
servicing. (Contact your authorized retailer for details.)
i The “NO.” is the number for the embroidery and sewing machine.
j Display the program version.

Memo
• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Baby Lock
retailer or at www.babylock.com for available updates (see page 240).

17
LCD SCREEN

Embroidery settings

i
a

b
c
d
e
f
g
h

a Select from among 10 embroidery frame displays (see page 178).


b Change the thread color display on the embroidery screen; thread number, color name or each time to embroider
(see page 177).
c When the thread number #123 is selected, select among six thread brands (see page 177).
d Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting (see page 176).
e Adjust the thread tension for embroidering.
f Select the height of the embroidery foot “W” during embroidering (see page 157).
g Change the display units (mm/inch).
h Change the initial mode of the display (embroidery/embroidery edit).
i Customize the thread color numbers (see page 210).

18
LCD SCREEN

■ Adjusting Screen Brightness


c
On the BRIGHTNESS OF LCD display, use
Note
and to adjust the screen
• All or part of the screen may sometimes
become darker or lighter because of brightness.
changes in the air temperature or other
changes in the environment around the
* Press to make the screen darker.
1
screen. This is normal and is not a sign of
malfunction. Adjust the screen if it is difficult

Getting Ready
to read. * Press to make the screen lighter.
• The screen may be dark immediately after
turning on the power. This is a function of
the LCD back light screen, and it is not a
sign of malfunction. The screen will return to
its normal level of brightness after
approximately 10 minutes.
• If you are not directly in front of the machine a
when you view the LCD, the colors may
appear to change or the screen may be
difficult to see. This is a characteristic of the
LCD, and not a sign of damage or
malfunction. For best results operate the
screen while sitting in front of the machine.

a
Press .

→ The Sewing settings screen appears.

b
Press .
a Brightness of LCD display

d
Press .

→ The General settings screen appears.

Memo

• Press or to display a different


settings screen.

19
LCD SCREEN

■ Choosing the Display Language

a
Press .

→ The Sewing settings screen appears.

b
Press .

→ The General settings screen appears.

c
Use and to choose the display
language.
* Choose from the following languages: [ENGLISH],
[GERMAN], [FRENCH], [ITALIAN], [DUTCH],
[SPANISH], [JAPANESE], [DANISH],
[NORWEGIAN], [FINNISH], [SWEDISH],
[PORTUGEUSE] or [RUSSIAN].

a Display language

d
Press .

20
LCD SCREEN

Using the Machine Operation Mode Key

Press to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
1

Getting Ready
displays information about displays information about displays information about

the main parts of the machine and their the operation buttons. threading the machine, changing presser feet,
functions. This is the first screen displayed etc.

when you press .

displays information about displays troubleshooting displays information about

attaching the embroidery unit, preparing information. cleaning the machine, etc.
fabric for embroidering, etc.

a Adjusting thread tension information

21
LCD SCREEN

Example: Displaying information about


e
Press to return to the original
upper threading
screen.

a
Press .
Using the Pattern Explanation
Key
b
Press .

→ The lower half of the screen will change. If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press to see

c
Press (upper threading). an explanation of the stitch selection.

Example: Displaying information about

a
Press .

b
Press .

→ The screen shows instructions for threading the


machine.

d
Read the instructions.

* Press to see a video of the displayed


instructions.

* Press to view the next page.


→ The screen shows information about .

c
Press to return to the original
screen.

22
LOWER THREADING

LOWER THREADING

a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
Winding the Bobbin top cover. 1
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the

Getting Ready
Press → → → spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
in that order to display a video example of
bobbin winding on the LCD (see page 22). Follow a
the steps explained below to complete the
operation. b

CAUTION
• The enclosed bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
a Groove of the bobbin
correctly. Use only the enclosed bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: X52800- b Spring on the shaft
150).
c
Set the supplemental spool pin in the “up”
position.
11.5 mm
(approx.
7/16 inch) Actual size a

This model Other models

■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin


With this machine, you can wind the bobbin during
sewing. While using the main spool pin to sew a Supplemental spool pin
embroidery, you can conveniently wind the bobbin
d
using the supplemental spool pin. Place the spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that thread
a unrolls from the front. Then push the spool
6 5 3, 4
cap onto the spool pin as far as possible to
2 secure the thread spool.
9
7, 8

l a
o
1 c
b
a Supplemental spool pin

a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool

23
LOWER THREADING

f
Pass the thread under the pin, and pass the
thread around the pretension disk making
CAUTION sure that the thread is under the pretension
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set disk.
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin, the thread will wind uneven on the bobbin
and eventually cause damage to the machine.
a
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small) b
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause damage to
the machine.

Memo a Pin
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound thread, b Pretension disk
use the small spool cap, and leave a small
g
space between the cap and the thread Wind the thread clockwise around the
spool. bobbin 5-6 times.

c b

a Spool cap (small)


3 1
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space

e h
With your right hand, hold the thread near Pass the end of the thread through the guide
the thread spool. With your left hand, hold slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the
the end of the thread, and use both hands to thread to the right to cut the thread with
pass the thread through the thread guide. the cutter.

a Guide slit (with built-in cutter)


b Bobbin winder seat

a Thread guide
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the process described. If the
thread is not cut with the cutter, and the
bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it
may tangle around the bobbin and cause the
needle to break.

24
LOWER THREADING

i ■ Using the Spool Pin


Set the bobbin holder to the left, until it
clicks into place. You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.

6 1
7

Getting Ready
2

a Bobbin holder (switch) 8


5 3
Memo 4
When the bobbin holder is set to the left, it
works as a switch to make the bobbin wind
automatically.

→ The bobbin starts winding automatically and stops


rotating when it is done winding. The bobbin holder
l
o
will return to the original position.
1
j
Cut the thread with the cutter and remove
a
the bobbin. Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.

b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.

Memo
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on
the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could
loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,
and could result in damage to the machine.
a Groove of the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft

CAUTION c
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the
the thread unwinds from the front of the
thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle
spool.
and possibly resulting in injury.

b
c

a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool

25
LOWER THREADING

d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its Setting the Bobbin
original position.

e
Holding the thread with your hands, slide Press → → →
the thread into the grooves on the thread
guide plate. in that order to display a video example of
the operation on the LCD (see page 22). Follow
the steps explained below to complete the
operation.

CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
a wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
a Thread guide plate

f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.

• The enclosed bobbin was designed specifically


for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the enclosed bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: X52800-
150).

a Thread guide 11.5 mm


(approx.
g
Pass the thread under the pin. Then pass the 7/16 inch) Actual size
thread around the pretension disk making
sure that the thread is under the pretension
disk.
This model Other models
a

b
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
c
sure to press in the LCD, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the machine
starts sewing.

a
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
a Thread guide
b Pin
c Pretension disk

h
Follow steps g through j on page 24
through 25.

26
LOWER THREADING

b g
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right. Pass the thread through the guide, and then
pull the thread out towards the front.

a b

Getting Ready
a
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
→ The bobbin cover opens.
a Cutter

c
Remove the bobbin cover. → The cutter cuts the thread.

d
Hold the bobbin with your right hand and Note
hold the end of the thread with your left Make sure that the thread is correctly inserted
hand. through the tension-adjusting spring of the
bobbin case. If it is not inserted correctly,
reinsert the thread.

e
Set the bobbin in the bobbin case so that a Tension-adjusting spring
the thread unwinds to the left.

CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread correctly.
Otherwise, the thread may break or the thread
tension will be incorrect.

h
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the
bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press
down on the right side to close the cover
f
Hold the bobbin lightly with your right (2).
hand, and then guide the thread with your
left hand.

27
LOWER THREADING

e
Pull up the bobbin thread, then pass it
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread under the presser foot and pull it about
100 mm (approx. 3-4 inches) toward the
There may be some sewing applications where back of the machine, making it even with
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for the upper thread.
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
free motion quilting or embroidery.

Memo
You can pull up the bobbin thread after a
threading the upper thread (see “UPPER b
THREADING” on page 29).

a
Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
a Upper thread
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover. b Bobbin thread

f
Replace the bobbin cover.

b
While holding the upper thread, press the
needle position button to lower the needle.

a Needle position button

c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.

d
Gently pull the upper thread, and a loop of
the bobbin thread will come out of the hole
in the needle plate.

28
UPPER THREADING

UPPER THREADING

a
Turn the main power to ON.
Threading Using the “Automatic 1
b
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
Threading” Button the needle.

Getting Ready
Press → → →

in that order to display a video example of


the operation on the LCD (see page 22). Follow
the steps explained below to complete the
operation.

Note
CAUTION If you try to thread the needle automatically
• Be sure to thread the machine properly. without raising the needle, the thread may not
Improper threading can cause the thread to thread correctly.
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
c
• When using accessories not included with this Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
machine, attach the accessory to the machine Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
after threading the machine. the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be
used with sewing machine needles 75/11
through 100/16.
a
• Thread such as transparent nylon
monofilament thread and thread with a
thickness of 130/20 or thicker cannot be b
used with the automatic threading function. c
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the wing needle or the twin
needle.
a Spool pin
• If the automatic threading function cannot be
b Spool cap
used, see “Threading Manually” on page 31.
c Thread spool

d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
7
original position.
6
CAUTION
5 3, 4 • If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
2 8 • Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
1 on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.

29
UPPER THREADING

h
Press the “Automatic Threading” button to
Memo
have the machine automatically thread the
When sewing with fine, cross-wound thread,
use the small spool cap, and leave a small needle.
space between the cap and the thread spool.

c b

a Spool cap (small)


b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space

e
Holding the thread with your hands, slide
the thread into the grooves on the thread
guide plate.

→ The upper threading is finished.

Memo
When the “Automatic Threading” button is
pressed, the presser foot will be automatically
lowered.
a
Note
In case the needle is not completely threaded,
a Thread guide plate
slowly pull the loop of the thread through from
the back of the needle.
f
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.

g
When finished pulling the thread through
the thread guide, cut the thread and leave
the thread in position. a

a About 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)

Memo
If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle bar
thread guides, perform the procedure again
starting from step c.

a Cutter

30
UPPER THREADING

Note
When the “Automatic Threading” button is 10
pressed, the presser foot will be automatically
lowered.
If you are using an incorrect needle and thread 8
11
combination, the hook may sometimes get
caught in the needle. If this happens, remove 9
1
the hook from the needle as described below. 7
5, 6

Getting Ready
3
4, 12
13
14
15 2

a
CAUTION Turn the main power to ON.

b
• The needle thread carrier will automatically Turn the handwheel so that the line on the
thread the needle when the “Automatic machine is aligned with the line on the
Threading” button is pressed. Be sure to keep handwheel.
your hands and other items away from the
needle area, otherwise injuries may occur.

Threading Manually
Automatic threading cannot be used when using
the wing needle, the twin needle, or special thread
with a thickness of 130/20 or thicker. In these
cases, thread the needle as described below. a
a Line on handwheel
CAUTION Memo
• Before manually threading the machine, be If the line on the machine is not aligned with
the line on the handwheel, the sewing
sure to press in the LCD, otherwise machine cannot be threaded. Check that the
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button line on the handwheel is facing up as shown in
or any other button is pressed and the machine the illustration above.
starts sewing.

c
Press at the lower right of the LCD

screen.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.

31
UPPER THREADING

d g
Raise the presser foot lever. Holding the thread with both hands, slide
the thread into the grooves on the thread
guide plate.

a
CAUTION
• If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing a Thread guide plate
machine cannot be threaded correctly.
h
While holding the thread in your right
hand, use your left hand to pull the thread
e
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
toward the threading path cover, then pass
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
it along the thread path as shown in the
the thread unwinds from the front of the
illustration.
spool.
Be sure to pass the thread along the right
side of the thread path guide.

1
a
a

b
c
b

a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool a Threading path cover
b Thread path guide
f
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
i
as possible, then return the spool pin to its Pull the thread under the thread path guide.
original position.

CAUTION a

• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set


incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break. a
(A)

a Thread path guide

32
UPPER THREADING

j m
Pull the thread up along the left side of the Holding the thread with both hands, pass
thread path guide to the top left corner of the thread through both the upper and
the threading path cover. lower needle bar thread guides.

a
1
(B)

Getting Ready
1
a

b 2
b

a Top left corner


b Threading path cover a Needle bar thread guide (upper)
b Needle bar thread guide (lower)
k
Pull the thread down to the needle bar
n
along the left side of the thread path guide. Pass the thread through the eye of the
* Make sure the thread is hooked at the top corner needle from front to back.
and positioned behind the transparent front cover.
a

(C)
b

a Thread take-up lever check window


o
b Transparent front cover Pass the thread through the presser foot,
Memo a
and then pull out about 100-150 mm
a

(approx. 4-6 inches) of thread toward the


b
b
back of the machine.

a Take-up lever b Thread

Look through the thread take-up lever check


window and check that the thread is correctly
fed through the take-up lever, turning the
handwheel toward you. a

l
Lower the presser foot lever.
a 10 cm-15 cm (approx. 4-6 inches)

p
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.

33
UPPER THREADING

b
Manually thread the machine.
Using the Twin Needle Mode * Follow the steps for threading a single needle for the
first threading (see “Threading Manually” on page
The twin needle can only be used for patterns that 31).

show after being selected. Before you


select a stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be
sewn in the twin needle mode (refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual).

CAUTION
c
• Use only twin needles made for this machine Pass the thread through the needle bar
(part code X59296-151). Other needles could thread guides on the needle bar, then
break, resulting in damage.
thread the needle on the left side.
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
a
damage.
• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle
could break and cause injury.
• When using the twin needle, be sure to use
presser foot “J”.
• When the twin needle is used, bunched a Needle bar thread guides
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used. Note
If this occurs, use monogramming foot “N”. • The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Manually thread the twin needle from
• Before changing the needle or threading the front to back. Using the “Automatic Threading”
button may result in damage to the machine.
machine, be sure to press in the
LCD, otherwise injuries may occur if the
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is
in the up position.
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
a

a
Press and install the twin needle
(see “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 39).

a Supplemental spool pin

34
UPPER THREADING

e g
Place the additional spool of thread on the Pass the thread through the thread guide
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread plate, following the sequence as described
unwinds from the back. Then push the below (or refer to “Threading Manually” on
spool cap onto the spool pin as far as page 31).
possible to secure the thread spool.
1

Getting Ready
a

c
b

a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool

f
Hold the thread from the spool with both
hands, and place the thread in the thread
guide.
* Do not place the thread in the bobbin winding
thread guide.

h
Do not pass the thread in the needle bar
thread guides on the needle bar. Thread the
needle on the right side.

a Thread guide

i
Press .

35
UPPER THREADING

j
Select a stitch pattern. (Example: ) Using Threads that Unwind
* Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end Quickly
of this manual for proper stitch to use with presser
foot “J”.
→ The Selected stitch is displayed. ■ Using the Spool Net
If using transparent nylon thread, metallic thread, or
Note other strong thread, place the included spool net
If the key is light gray after selecting over the spool before using it. When using these
threads, threading must be done manually.
the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be sewn If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to
in the twin needle mode. the spool size before placing it over the spool.

b
k
Press to select the twin needle
a Spool net
mode. b Thread spool
c Spool pin
a
a d Spool cap

dc

Memo
• When threading the spool with the spool net
on, the thread may not come out enough.
Make sure that 5-6 cm (approx. 2 - 2-1/2
inches) of thread are pulled out.
• It may be necessary to adjust the thread
tension when using the spool net.

■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin


Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly
shaped thread spool, and when sewing or
embroidering with metallic thread.

a
Insert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin
winder shaft.
a Single needle/twin needle setting

→ appears. d
c a Bobbin winder shaft
b Vertical spool pin
CAUTION b c Spool felt
Be sure to set the twin needle mode when using d Thread spool
the twin needle. Using the twin needle while the a
machine is in single needle mode could cause the
needle to break, resulting in damage.

b
Install the spool felt and the thread spool in
l
Start sewing.
that order, and then thread the upper
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing
thread.

Memo
• When setting the thread spool, set it so that
the thread winds off from the front of the
spool.
• If using metallic thread, we recommend that
you use a 90/14 home sewing machine
needle.
• This method keeps the thread from twisting
as it comes off the spool pin.

36
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

CAUTION 1

Getting Ready
• Always press on the screen before changing the presser foot. If is not pressed and the
“Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.

Removing the Presser Foot Attaching the Presser Foot

a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle. CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.

a
Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch
in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever
so that the presser foot pin snaps into the
b
Press . notch in the holder.
* If “OK to automatically lower the presser foot?”
appears on the LCD screen, press OK to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.
a
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
b

a Notch
b Pin

b
Press to unlock all keys and

buttons.

d c
Press the black button on the presser foot Raise the presser foot lever.
holder and remove the presser foot.

a Black button
b Presser foot holder

37
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT

d
Lower the presser foot lever. Insert the
Attaching the Walking Foot screw, and tighten the screw securely with
the screwdriver.
The walking foot holds the fabric between the
presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric.
This enables you to have better fabric control
when sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilting or
velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as vinyl
cloth, leather, or synthetic leather).

Note
• When sewing with the walking foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.

Memo
• The walking foot can only be used with CAUTION
straight or zigzag stitch patterns. Reverse
stitches cannot be sewn with the walking • Use the included screwdriver to tighten the
foot. Only select straight or zigzag stitch screw securely. If the screw is loose, the
patterns with reinforcement stitches. needle may strike the presser foot and cause
injury.

a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser • Be sure to turn the handwheel toward the
Foot” on the previous page. front of the machine to check that the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If the needle

b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder strikes the presser foot, injury may result.
to remove the presser foot holder.

c
Set the operation lever of the walking foot
so that the needle clamp screw is set
between the fork, and position the walking
foot on the presser foot bar.

a c d

a Operation lever
b Needle clamp screw
c Fork
d Presser foot bar

38
CHANGING THE NEEDLE

CHANGING THE NEEDLE

CAUTION 1

Getting Ready
• Always press on the screen before changing the needle. If is not pressed and the Start/
Stop button or another operation button is pressed accidentally, the machine will start and injury may
result.
• Use only sewing machine needles made for home use-type 130/705H needle. Other needles may bend or
break and may cause injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle will easily break and may cause injury.

c
Use the screwdriver to turn the screw
Memo
toward the front of the machine and loosen
To check the needle correctly, place the flat
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check the the screw, then remove the needle.
needle from the top and the sides. Throw
away any bent needles.

a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise • Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp
the needle. screw. Doing so may damage the needle or
machine.

b
Press .

* If “OK to automatically lower the presser foot?”


appears on the LCD screen, press OK to continue.
→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and
operation buttons are locked.

Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole
in the needle plate with fabric or paper to
prevent the needle from falling into the
machine.

39
CHANGING THE NEEDLE

d
With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle all the way to
the top of the needle stopper (viewing
window) in the needle clamp. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.

a Needle stopper
b Hole for setting the needle
c Flat side of needle

CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle
is not completely inserted or the needle clamp
screw is loose, the needle may break or the
machine may be damaged.

e
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.

40
CHANGING THE NEEDLE

■ About the Needle


The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the proper
needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some things to keep
in mind about needles.


The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.
Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.
1
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.

Getting Ready
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative
stitches.
• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle HA × 130 for embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on. Ball point needles
(golden colored) 90/14 are not recommended for embroidery, as they may bend or break, causing injury.
• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or
stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could
result in injury.
• A home sewing machine needle 75/11 is inserted in the sewing machine.
■ Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various fabrics.
Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.

Fabric Thread Size of needle


Type Size
Medium weight fabric Broadcloth Cotton 60 - 80 75/11 - 90/14
Taffeta Synthetic mercerized 60 - 80
Flannel, Gabardine Silk or silk finished 50
Lightweight fabric Lawn, Batiste Cotton 60 - 80 65/9 - 75/11
Georgette Synthetic mercerized 60 - 80
Challis, Satin Silk 50
Heavyweight fabric Denim Cotton 30 - 50 90/14 - 100/16
Corduroy Synthetic mercerized 50
Tweed Silk 50
Stretch fabric Jersey Thread for knits 50 - 60 Ball point needle
Tricot (golden colored)
75/11 - 90/14
Easily frayed fabrics Cotton thread 50 - 80 65/9 - 90/14
Synthetic thread
Silk thread 50
For top stitching Synthetic mercerized 30 90/14 - 100/16
Silk 30

Memo
For transparent nylon thread, always use needle 90/14 - 100/16.
The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper threading.

CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper
combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may
cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may
pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.

41
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF

42
2
Chapter 2
Sewing Basics

SEWING ..............................................................................................44
Sewing a Stitch........................................................................................................44
■ Using the Foot Controller................................................................................................45
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ...............................................................................46
Sewing Curves .........................................................................................................46
Changing Sewing Direction .....................................................................................46
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less ...................................................................46
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics...................................................................................47
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot .............................................................47
■ If the Fabric does not Feed ..............................................................................................47
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics .....................................................................................48
Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................................................48
STITCH SETTINGS ...............................................................................49
Setting the Stitch Width ..........................................................................................49
Setting the Stitch Length .........................................................................................49
Setting the Thread Tension ......................................................................................50
■ Proper Thread Tension ....................................................................................................50
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight...............................................................................................50
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose..............................................................................................50

USEFUL FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................51


Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ........................................................................51
Automatic Thread Cutting .......................................................................................52
■ Using the Knee Lifter.......................................................................................................53
Pivoting ...................................................................................................................53
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) ....................... 55
Locking the Screen ..................................................................................................55
SEWING

SEWING

CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands
away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Take care that the needle does not strike basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.

Sewing a Stitch

a d
Turn the main power to ON, and push the Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold
“Needle Position” button to raise the the fabric and thread ends in your left hand,
needle. and turn the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position.
b
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.

Memo
The black button on the left side of presser
→ The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD.
does not feed or when sewing thick seams
(see page 47). Normally, you can sew without
pressing the black button.
c
Install the presser foot (see “CHANGING
THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 37).
e
Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
CAUTION
f
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the control slide.
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
sewing.
possibly resulting in injury.

a b

a Slow
b Fast

44
SEWING

g
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
Note
sewing.
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand. thread, or other decorative threads, use the
thread cutter on the side of the machine.

j
When the needle has stopped moving, raise 2
the presser foot and remove the fabric.

Sewing Basics
Memo
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop
This machine is equipped with a bobbin thread
sewing. sensor that warns you when the bobbin thread
is almost empty. When the bobbin thread is
nearly empty, the machine automatically
stops. However, if the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed, a few stitches can be sewn. If the
warning displays, re-thread the machine
immediately.

■ Using the Foot Controller


You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.

i
Press the “Thread Cutter” button to trim
the threads.
CAUTION
Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect in
the foot controller. Doing so could cause a fire or
an electric shock.

Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, the
“Start/Stop” button has no effect on sewing.
• The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering. The foot controller can be
used for sewing utility and decorative
→ The needle will return to the up position stitches when the embroidery unit is
automatically. attached.

a
Pull the retractable cord out from the foot
CAUTION controller to the desired length, and then
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after insert the foot controller plug into its jack
the threads have been cut. Doing so could on the machine.
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle, b
possibly resulting in damage. a

a Foot controller
b Foot controller jack

Note
Do not pull retractable cord out beyond the red
mark.

45
SEWING

b
Slowly depress the foot controller to start
sewing. Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.

Memo
The speed set using the sewing speed
controller is the foot controller’s maximum
sewing speed.

c
Release the foot controller to stop the Changing Sewing Direction
machine.
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
Memo and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise
(For U.S.A. only) the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn
Foot controller: Model S the fabric so that you can sew in the new
This foot controller can be used with models: direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
BLG2-NZ/BLG2 lower the presser foot and start sewing.

Sewing Reinforcement Stitches


Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You
can use the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
to sew reverse/reinforcement stitches manually
(see page 3).

The pivot setting is useful when changing the


If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on
sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at
the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement
the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the
stitches) will be sewn automatically at the
needle in the fabric and the presser foot is
beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button
automatically raised so the fabric can easily be
is pressed. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement
rotated (see “Pivoting” on page 53).
Stitch” button to sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) automatically at the end of ■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm
sewing (see page 51). or Less
Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after
changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the
basting thread toward the back while sewing.

a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

46
SEWING

■ If the Fabric does not Feed


Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or
when sewing thick seams, press the black button on
The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm the left side of presser foot “J”.
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam
a
causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the Raise the presser foot.
fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.
b
While keeping the black button on the left
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the
presser foot.
2

Sewing Basics
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than 6 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the sewing
machine. This may cause the needle to break
and cause injury.

c
Release the button.
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the
Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are
sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric
which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use
the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its
highest position. The fabric will now fit under the
presser foot.
→ The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.

Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the
foot will return to its normal position.
• When “AUTOMATIC FABRIC SENSOR
SYSTEM” (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure) in the machine settings screen is
set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is
Memo automatically detected by the internal
You cannot use the presser foot lever after sensor so the fabric can be fed smoothly for
the presser foot has been raised using the best sewing results. (See page 55 for
“Presser Foot Lifter” button. details.)

47
SEWING

Sewing Lightweight Fabrics


Place thin paper or tear away embroidery
stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.
Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after
sewing.

a Thin paper

Sewing Stretch Fabrics


First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.

Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch fabrics,
decrease the pressure of the presser foot.

a Basting stitching

48
STITCH SETTINGS

STITCH SETTINGS
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,
and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual settings.
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (see “Saving
Your Stitch Settings” on page 60), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.
2
Press to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.

Sewing Basics
Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the zigzag stitch pattern width.

→ The value in the display gets bigger.

Memo
Memo • Press to return the stitch width to the
• For an alternate method of changing the original setting.
stitch width using the speed controller, see
page 82.
Note
Example: After adjusting the stitch width, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) and
Press to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern width. check that the needle does not touch the presser foot.
If the needle hits the presser foot, the needle may
bend or break.

Setting the Stitch Length


Follow the steps below when you want to change
the stitch pattern length.

→ The value in the display gets smaller.

49
STITCH SETTINGS

Example: ■ Proper Thread Tension


The upper and lower threads should cross near the
Press to shorten the stitch length.
center of the fabric. If the thread tension is not
properly set, the seam may have a poor finish or the
fabric may pucker.

c
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
d
Press to lengthen the stitch length.

a Wrong side
b Surface
c Upper thread
d Bobbin thread

■ Upper Thread is Too Tight


If the bobbin thread can be seen on the surface of
the fabric, press .

→ The value in the display gets bigger.


c
Memo
• Press to return the stitch length to the
b
original setting. d
a

a Bobbin thread
CAUTION b Upper thread
If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen the c Surface
stitch length and continue sewing. Do not d Locks appear on surface of fabric
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and ■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
cause injury. If the upper thread can be seen on the wrong side of
the fabric, press .

Setting the Thread Tension


c d
You may need to change the thread tension,
depending on the fabric and thread being used.
Follow the steps below to make any necessary
changes.
a

a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c Wrong side
d Locks appear on wrong side of fabric

Memo
• Press to return the thread tension to
the original setting.

50
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

c
Set the fabric in the start position and start
Automatic Reinforcement sewing.
Stitching
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic reinforcement stitching function before
sewing, and the machine will automatically sew 2
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning

Sewing Basics
and end of sewing. a

a
Select a stitch pattern.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

b
Press to set the automatic → The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
reinforcement stitching function. sewing.

Memo
If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press it again to continue. The
machine will not sew reverse reinforcement
stitches again.

d
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button.

→ The key will display as . a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)


→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
Memo reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the Memo
beginning of sewing. If you select one of these To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitches, the machine will automatically turn on
stitching function, press again, so it
this function (the key appears as when
the stitch is selected). appears as .

51
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

c
Set the fabric in the start position and start
Automatic Thread Cutting sewing.

After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the


automatic thread cutting function before sewing,
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end
of sewing. This function is useful when sewing a
buttonholes and bar tacks.

a
Select a stitch pattern.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)

b
Press to set the automatic thread → The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
cutting function. sewing.

Memo
If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press the same button again to
continue. The beginning reverse/
reinforcement stitches will not be sewn again.

d
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitching” button.

→ The key will display as . a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)


→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
Memo reinforcement stitches), then trim the thread.
This function is set automatically when sewing
embroidery.
Memo
To turn off the automatic thread cutting
function, press again, so it appears as

52
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

■ Using the Knee Lifter


Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the Pivoting
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands free
to handle the fabric. If the pivot setting is selected, the machine stops
with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the
a
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the presser foot is automatically raised to an
notches in the jack, and then insert the knee appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is
lifter as far as possible. pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed
again, the presser foot is automatically lowered
and sewing continues. This function is useful for
stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
2
CAUTION

Sewing Basics
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
Note from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
If the knee lifter is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may come
out during use. Memo
When the pivot setting is selected, the height
b
Use your knee to move the knee lifter to the of the presser foot when sewing is stopped
right in order to raise the presser foot. can be changed according to the type of fabric
Release the knee lifter to lower the presser being sewn. Press to display
foot. “PIVOTING HEIGHT” on P. 1 of the settings
screen. Press or to select one of the
three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or 7.5 mm). To
raise the presser foot further, increase the
setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is set.)

CAUTION
Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may break
or the thread tension may loosen.

53
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

c
Place the fabric under the presser foot with
Note
the needle at the starting point of the
• The “NEEDLE POSITION” (P. 2 of the
settings screen) must be set in the down stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button. The machine will begin sewing.
position for the pivot function to be
used. When “NEEDLE POSITION” is set in
the raised position, appears as light
gray and cannot be used.
• When the setting is selected, the pivot
function can only be used with stitches
where presser foot J or N is indicated in the
upper-left corner of the screen. If any other
stitch is selected, appears as light gray
and is not available.
• Since the presser foot is fully raised when
the automatic thread cutting key is pressed, Memo
press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
lower the presser foot, and then press the sewing, then press it again to continue,
“Start/Stop” button to continue sewing. reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches) will
not be sewn.
• If the pivot setting is selected, or

d
beside “PRESSER FOOT HEIGHT” in the Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
settings screen are not available and the machine at the point where the sewing
setting cannot be changed.
direction changes.

a
Select a stitch.

b
Press to select the pivot setting.

→ The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and


the presser foot is raised.

e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the “Start/
Stop” button.

→ The key appears as .

→ The presser foot is automatically lowered, and


sewing continues.

54
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

Automatic Fabric Sensor System Locking the Screen


(Automatic Presser Foot
If the screen is locked before starting to sew, the
Pressure) various settings such as the stitch width and stitch
length are locked and cannot be changed. This
The thickness of the fabric is automatically prevents screen settings from accidentally being
detected and the presser foot pressure is changed or the machine from being stopped while
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor large pieces of fabric or projects are being sewn.
while sewing, so your fabric is fed smoothly. The The screen can be locked when sewing utility
fabric sensor system works continuously while stitches and character decorative stitches.
sewing. This function is useful for sewing over 2
a
thick seams (see page 47), or quilting (see page Select a stitch pattern.
80).

Sewing Basics
b
If necessary, adjust any settings such as the
stitch width and stitch length.

c
Press to lock the screen settings.

→ The key appears as .

d
Sew your project.

e
When you are finished sewing, press
again to unlock the screen settings.

CAUTION
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the

a
Press . screen by pressing . While the screen is
→ The settings screen appears. locked, no other key can be operated.
• The settings are unlocked when the machine is
b
Set “AUTOMATIC FABRIC SENSOR turned off and on.
SYSTEM” to “ON”.

c
Press to return to the original screen.

55
USEFUL FUNCTIONS

56
3
Chapter 3
Utility Stitches

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ......................58 One-step Buttonholes ........................................................97


■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics ............................................................100
■ Stitch Selection Screens............................................................ 58 ■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do not Fit into
Selecting a Stitch .............................................................. 59 the Button Holder Plate ..........................................................100
■ Using the Mirror Image Key ..................................................... 59 Four-step Buttonholes......................................................101
■ Using the Image Key................................................................. 59 ■ Darning...................................................................................103
Saving Your Stitch Settings ............................................... 60 Bar Tacks .........................................................................105
■ Saving Settings.......................................................................... 60 ■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics......................................................106
■ Retrieving Saved Settings.......................................................... 61 Button Sewing .................................................................107
Using the Sewing Type Selection Key ............................... 61
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons........................................................108
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button .............................................108
SEWING THE STITCHES .................................63
Eyelet...............................................................................109
Straight Stitches ................................................................ 63 Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch) .....110
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle Needle Zipper Insertion...............................................................111
Position Stitches Only) ............................................................. 65
■ Centered Zipper......................................................................111
■ Needle Plate and Needle Plate Cover Marks ............................ 65
■ Inserting a Side Zipper ............................................................112
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot .... 65
■ Basting ..................................................................................... 67
Dart Seam......................................................................... 67
Gathering.......................................................................... 68
Flat Fell Seam.................................................................... 69
Pintuck.............................................................................. 69
Zigzag Stitches.................................................................. 71
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ......................................... 71
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) .............................................. 71
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)..................................................... 72
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ..................................... 72
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................... 72
Elastic Zigzag Stitches....................................................... 73
■ Tape Attaching ......................................................................... 73
■ Overcasting .............................................................................. 73
Overcasting ...................................................................... 74
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ........................................ 74
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J” .......................................... 75
■ Overcasting Using the Optional Side Cutter ............................ 76
■ When Sewing Straight Stitches While Using the Side Cutter .... 78
Quilting ............................................................................ 79
■ Piecing ..................................................................................... 80
■ Quilting .................................................................................... 80
■ Appliqué................................................................................... 81
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches ...................................................... 82
■ Free-motion Quilting................................................................ 83
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free-motion Echo Quilting Foot “E” ....... 86
Blind Hem Stitches ........................................................... 89
■ If the Needle does not Catch the Fold ...................................... 90
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Fold ............................ 90
Appliqué ........................................................................... 90
■ Sewing Sharp Curves ................................................................ 91
Shelltuck Stitches.............................................................. 91
Scallop Stitches................................................................. 92
Top Stitching..................................................................... 92
Smocking Stitches ............................................................. 93
Fagoting ............................................................................ 93
Tape or Elastic Attaching .................................................. 94
Heirloom .......................................................................... 95
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch) ................................................ 95
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1)) ......................................... 95
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2)) ......................................... 96
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES


■ Stitch Selection Screens
There are 5 categories of Utility Stitches. indicates that there is more than one stitch selection screen
for that category.
Straight/Overcasting/Quilting Stitches Decorative Stitches

Heirloom Stitches Buttonholes/Bar tacks Multi-directional Sewing

58
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

■ Using the Mirror Image Key


Selecting a Stitch Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,
you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch.
a
Turn the main power to ON.
→ Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight
If is lit when you select a stitch, it will be
stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.
selected in the setting screen.
Note

b
Use to select the If is light gray after you select a stitch,
you cannot create a horizontal mirror image of
category you want. the selected stitch (this is true of buttonholes,
multi-directional sewing, and others).
* Press to view this screen if another screen
displays.
Press to create a horizontal mirror image of
* Press to view the next page. the selected stitch.
The key will display as .
3

Utility Stitches
a

■ Using the Image Key


You can display an image of the selected stitch. You
a Preview of the selected stitch can also check and change the colors of the image
on the screen.
b Stitch selection screen

c a
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew. Press .

Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.

→ An image of the selected stitch is displayed.

59
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

b
Press to change the thread color of
Saving Your Stitch Settings
the stitch on the screen.
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch
* Press to display an enlarged image of the length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,
stitch. automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset
in the machine for each stitch. However, if you
Memo have specific settings that you wish to reuse later
• The color changes every time you press for a stitch, you can change the settings so that
. they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of
settings can be saved for a single stitch.
• The units of the stitch display area are in
mm. ■ Saving Settings

a
Select a stitch. (Example: )

a Stitch screen

c
Press to go back to the original
b
Specify your preferred settings.
screen.

60
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

c
Press the numbered key of the settings to be
c
Press .
retrieved.

* Press to return to the original screen


without retrieving settings.

a 3

Utility Stitches
→ The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.

Memo
If you try to save settings when there are a Numbered keys
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch, the
d
message “The pockets are full. Delete a Press .
pattern” will appear. Close the message and
refer to “Deleting Saved Settings” on this page. → The selected settings are retrieved, and the original
screen automatically appears.
■ Retrieving Saved Settings Memo
Deleting Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
You can delete the selected setting by press-

Memo ing . Press the numbered key of the


When a stitch is selected, the last settings setting to be deleted. Press , press
retrieved are displayed. The last settings
retrieved are retained even if the machine was and then . The new setting
turned off or a different stitch was selected.
will be saved in place of the recently deleted
setting.
b
Press .

Using the Sewing Type Selection


Key

You can also select utility stitches using .


Use this key when you are not sure which stitch to
use for your application, or to get advice about
sewing particular stitches. For example, if you
want to sew overcasting, but you do not know
which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you
can use this screen to get advice. We recommend
that beginners use this method to select stitches.

61
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES

c
Example: Displaying information about Read the explanations and select the
overcasting appropriate stitch.

* Press or to scroll the page.


a
Press .

→ The screen displays directions for sewing the


→ The advice screen is displayed. selected stitch.

d
Follow the directions to sew the stitch.
b
Press .
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to return to the original screen.

→ The upper part of the screen displays a selection of


overcasting stitches with explanations.

62
SEWING THE STITCHES

SEWING THE STITCHES

Straight Stitches

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Straight stitch (Left) General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/ (0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Straight stitch (Left) General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J) 3
Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,

Utility Stitches
(Middle) etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/ (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,
(Middle) etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
while pressing “Reverse/ (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Triple stretch stitch General sewing for
0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
reinforcement and decorative
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
topstitching
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing and
1.0 1.0 - 3.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
decorative applications
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Decorative stitch Decorative stitching, top


0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
stitching
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Basting stitch Basting


0.0 0.0 - 7.0 20.0 5.0 - 30.0
NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/4) (3/16 - 1-3/16)

J J

a b

a b

a Left needle position a Reverse stitch


b Middle needle position b Reinforcement stitch

Memo
If the selected stitch has a double mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reverse stitches
holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button.
If the selected stitch has a dot mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reinforcement stitches
holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (see page 46).

63
SEWING THE STITCHES

a
Select a stitch.

CAUTION
Be sure the needle does not strike a basting pin, or
any other objects, during sewing. The thread
could tangle or the needle could break, causing
injury.

f
When sewing is completed, hold the
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew 3-4 reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) at the end of the seam.

b
Attach presser foot “J”.

* Attach presser foot “N” when you select .

c
Hold the thread tails and fabric with your
left hand, and turn the handwheel with
g
After sewing, press the “Thread Cutter”
your right hand to insert the needle into the
button to trim the threads.
fabric.

a
Memo
a Sewing start position When the automatic thread cutting and
automatic reinforcement stitch keys on the
d
Lower the presser foot, and hold the screen are selected, reverse stitches (or
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to reinforcement stitches) will be sewn
sew 3-4 stitches. automatically at the beginning of sewing when
the “Start/Stop” button is pressed. Press the
→ The machine sews reverse stitches (or reinforcement
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
stitches).
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
and trim the thread automatically at the end of
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew sewing.
forward.

a Reverse stitches
→ The machine will begin sewing slowly.

64
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Changing the Needle Position (Left ■ Needle Plate and Needle Plate Cover
or Middle Needle Position Stitches Marks
Only) For a standard 16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) seam
When you select left or middle needle position allowance, set the width to 0.0 mm on the screen.
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the
stitches, you can use and in the stitch 16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate.
width display to change the position of the needle.
Match the distance from the right edge of the presser c
foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align
the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the d
fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.

a
a f
3

Utility Stitches
g

a Stitch width cb

Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches a 16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch)


b For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
c For stitches with a left needle position
d Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
e Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
f Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin
J J J J cover <inch>
g Left needle position on the needle plate cover
<inch>

■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle


Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
12.0 mm 8.5 mm 6.5 mm 5.0 mm
foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
(approx. (approx. (approx. (approx. 3/
1/2 inch) 11/32 1/4 inch) 16 inch)
needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch
inch) needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing
thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend
to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate
during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small
opening on the foot provides support for the fabric
as the needle goes through the fabric.

CAUTION
Always use the straight stitch foot in combination
with the straight stitch needle plate.

65
SEWING THE STITCHES

a g
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to Insert the bobbin case in its original
raise the presser foot and turn the main position (see page 227), and then attach the
power to OFF. needle plate cover.

b h
Remove the flat bed attachment or the After reinstalling the needle plate cover,
embroidery unit if either are attached. select any of the straight stitches.

c
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you. Memo
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
• Always secure the needle plate before
inserting the bobbin case into its original
position.
a

a Needle plate cover CAUTION


• Selecting other stitches will cause an error
d
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out. message to be displayed.
• Be sure to turn the handwheel slowly in your
direction before sewing and make sure that the
needle is not contacting the straight stitch foot
and straight stitch needle plate.

i
Attach the straight stitch foot.

a Bobbin case
a

e
Use the screwdriver included with the
b
machine to unscrew and remove the regular
needle plate.

a Notch
b Pin

j
Start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and

f
the presser foot “J”.
Set the straight stitch needle plate in place
and use the screwdriver to tighten the plate.
Memo
To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a
fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch
length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier
needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.

Note
Align the two screw holes on the needle plate
with the two holes on the machine and screws
in the needle plate.

66
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Basting
Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.

a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew reinforcement stitches, then
b
continue sewing. Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the
dart and then sew from the wide end to the
other end without stretching the fabric.
* If automatic reinforcement stitching is preset, a
reinforcement stitch will automatically be sewn at
the beginning of sewing.

3
Memo

Utility Stitches
If you do not want to use a reinforcement
stitch at the beginning; you should lift the
presser foot, rotate the handwheel, pull up the
bobbin thread and pull a length of top and
bobbin thread out from the rear of the a Basting
machine.
c
Cut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm
You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx. (approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both
1-3/16 inches) ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.

a
a Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx. 1-3/16 inches)

c
Sew while keeping the fabric straight.

d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart
with a needle.

d
End the basting with reinforcement stitches.

67
SEWING THE STITCHES

e d
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat. Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to
the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

b a

Gathering a Seam line


b 10 to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)

a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
foot “J”.
desired amount of gather, then tie the
threads.

f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.

b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).

* If you press after pressing , the


stitch length will be set automatically to 4.0 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and the thread tension will be
automatically set to 2.0.

g
Sew on the seam line and remove the
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by basting stitch.
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (see page
28).

b
c
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)

68
SEWING THE STITCHES

e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the
Flat Fell Seam shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.

Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges


neatly.
a

a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
a

b
With right sides of the fabric together, sew
the seam line, then cut half of the seam
allowance from the side on which the flat
fell seam will lie. a Wrong side
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
Finished flat fell seam
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the
3
thread automatically at the end of sewing.

Utility Stitches
a a

a Surface
b
Pintuck

a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of
a About 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch)
the fabric.
b Wrong side

c
Spread the fabric out along the seam line.

a Wrong side
a
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts
a Seam line
only.
b Wrong side

d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the
shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them.

a a

a Surface

a Wrong side

69
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Select and attach presser foot “I”.

d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reinforcement
stitches will be sewn automatically at the beginning
of sewing. Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the
thread automatically at the end of sewing.

b c
I

a Width for pintuck


b Wrong side
c Surface

e
Iron the folds in the same direction.

70
SEWING THE STITCHES

Zigzag Stitches
Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting, appliqué, patchwork, and many other applications.
Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”.
If the stitch which you select has a double mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reverse
stitches by holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button.
If the stitch which you select has a dot mark “ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew reinforcement
stitches by holding the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button (see page 46).

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reverse stitch is sewn while 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
(1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
3
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.

Utility Stitches
Reinforcement stitch is sewn 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0 OK
while pressing “Reverse/ (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Zigzag stitch (right) Start from right needle position,
3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 4.0 OK
zigzag sew at left.
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

Zigzag stitch (left) Start from left needle position,


3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 4.0 OK
zigzag sew at right.
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

a ■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)


Select a stitch.
Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric
while positioning the right-hand side needle drop
point just outside the edge of the fabric.

a Needle drop position

■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)


Attach the appliqué material using a temporary
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.
* Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand
side needle drop point just outside the edge of the
fabric.

71
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) c


Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it place, making sure that the gimp thread can
over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch be fed freely.
bridges both pieces of fabric. * Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.

■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag


Stitch)
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine (approx. 1/16 - 3/32 inch).
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with

e
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the Attach presser foot “N”.
curve.

f
Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.

a
N

■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a


Zigzag Stitch)

a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine a Fabric (right side)
(see page 27). b Gimp thread

g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to
b
Thread gimp thread through the hole in the
cord guide bobbin cover from top to make a decorative finish.
bottom. Position the thread in the notch at
the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.

c
b

a Notch
b Gimp thread
c Hole

72
SEWING THE STITCHES

Elastic Zigzag Stitches


Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching, overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other uses.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
2 step elastic zigzag Overcasting (medium weight
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
and stretch fabrics), tape and
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)
elastic
2 step elastic zigzag Overcasting (medium weight
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
and stretch fabrics), tape and
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)
elastic
3 step elastic zigzag Overcasting (medium,
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
heavyweight and stretch fabrics),
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)
tape and elastic
3
a ■ Tape Attaching
Select a stitch.

Utility Stitches
Stretch the tape flat. While stretching the tape flat,
sew the tape to the fabric.

a Tape

■ Overcasting
Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of
stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge
b
Attach presser foot “J”. of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side
needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.

73
SEWING THE STITCHES

Overcasting
Use for the beginning and end of seams in skirts or trousers, and the beginning and end of all cuttings.
Use presser foot “G”, presser foot “J”, or the optional side cutter attachment depending on the kind of
overcasting stitch you select.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”
Stitch width Stitch length
Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of light and medium
3.5 2.5 - 5.0 2.0 1.0 - 4.0
weight fabrics NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of heavyweight


5.0 2.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
fabric NO
(3/16) (3/32 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of medium,


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
heavyweight and easily frayable NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)
fabrics or decorative stitching.

a c
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “G”. Sew along the presser foot guide.

a Guide

CAUTION
• After the stitch width is adjusted, turn the
handwheel toward you by hand and check that
b
Lower the presser foot so that the presser the needle does not touch the presser foot. If
foot guide is set flush against the edge of the the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
fabric. may break and cause injury.

G
a

a The needle should not touch


• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.

74
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”


Stitch width Stitch length
Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Overcasting stitch Reinforced seaming of stretch
5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.5 - 4.0 OK
fabric
(3/16) (0 - 9/32) (3/32) (1/32 - 3/16) (J)

Overcasting stitch Reinforcing of medium stretch


5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.5 - 4.0 OK
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
(3/16) (0 - 9/32) (3/32) (1/32 - 3/16) (J)
decorative stitching
Overcasting stitch Reinforcement of stretch fabric
4.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 1.0 - 4.0 OK
or decorative stitching
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Overcasting stitch Stretch knit seam


5.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.0
(15/
1.0 - 7.0 3.0 1.0 - 4.0 OK 3
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)

Utility Stitches
Single diamond Reinforcement of stretch fabric 6.0
1.0 - 7.0 1.8 1.0 - 4.0 OK
overcast (15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)

a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.

b
Sew with the needle dropping slightly off
the edge of the fabric.

a Needle drop position

75
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Overcasting Using the Optional Side Cutter


By using the side cutter, you can do overcasting while cutting the fabric.

CAUTION
• Make sure to only select one of the stitches listed below. Using another stitch may cause the needle to hit
the presser foot and break, possibly causing injury.

Memo
Thread the needle manually when using the side cutter, or only attach the side cutter after threading the
needle using the “Automatic Threading” button.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting
0.0 0.0 - 2.5 2.5 0.2 - 5.0
fabrics NO
(0) (0 - 3/32) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)

With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting fabrics


3.5 3.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


3.5 3.5 - 5.0 2.0 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

a c
Select a stitch. Position the fork on the side cutter’s
operating lever onto the needle clamp
screw.

a Needle clamp screw


b
Follow the steps on page 37 to remove the b Operating lever
presser foot.
Memo
Make sure that the fork of the operating lever
is set onto the needle clamp screw firmly.

76
SEWING THE STITCHES

d g
Position the side cutter so that the side Thread the needle manually and pull out a
cutter pin is aligned with the notch in the long section of the upper thread. Pass it
presser foot holder, and then lower the below the presser foot and pull it out in the
presser foot. fabric feed direction.

a b
b

a
a Notch in presser foot holder
b Pin a Presser foot
→ The side cutter is attached. b Upper thread

h
3
e
Make a cut of approximately 20 mm Start sewing.
(approx. 3/4 inch) in the fabric.

Utility Stitches
a

a 20 mm (approx. 3/4 inch)


→ A seam allowance is cut while the stitching is sewn.

f
Position the fabric so that the right side of
Note
the cut is on top of the guide plate and the
If the width has been adjusted, turn the
left side of the cut is underneath the presser handwheel by hand to check that the needle
foot. does not touch the side cutter. If the needle
touches the side cutter, it might cause the
needle to break.

a Guide plate (lower knife)


b Presser foot

Memo
If the fabric is not positioned correctly, the
fabric will not be cut.

77
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ When Sewing Straight Stitches While


Using the Side Cutter
The seam margin should be approximately 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch).

a Seam margin

Memo
• The fabric will not be cut if the whole fabric is
simply spread out underneath the presser
foot guide plate. Set the fabric as explained
in step f from the previous section, and
then start sewing.

• One layer of 13 oz. denim can be cut.


• Clean the side cutter after use to avoid
having dust and scraps of thread build up on
it.
• Add a small amount of oil as required to the
cutting edge of the cutter.

78
SEWING THE STITCHES

Quilting
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily with this machine. When making a quilt, you will find it
convenient to use the knee lifter and foot controller to free your hands for other tasks (see “Using the Foot
Controller” on page 45 and /or see “Using the Knee Lifter” on page 53).
If there is a “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display, the indicated stitch is intended for quilting.

Type of presser Stitch width Stitch length


foot [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Pattern Name of pattern Use
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork


(Right) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right 5.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork

3
(Middle) 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
— — NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork

Utility Stitches
(Left) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left 1.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Hand-look Quilting stitch made to look like


quilting hand quilting stitch 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Quilting Zigzag stitch for quilting and


appliqué zigzag sewing on appliqué quilt pieces 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0
NO
stitch (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)

Quilting Quilting stitch for invisible appliqué


appliqué stitch or attaching binding 1.5 0.5 - 5.0 1.8 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Quilting Background quilting


stippling 7.0 1.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/4) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

79
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Piecing ■ Quilting
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called Sewing together the quilt top, batting, and backing is
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make called quilting. You can sew the quilt with the
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx. walking foot to keep the quilt top, batting, and
1/4 inch). backing from sliding. The walking foot has a set of
feed dogs that move together with the feed dogs in
the needle plate during sewing.
a
Select or and attach presser foot For straight line quilting, use the walking foot and
the straight stitch needle plate. Always select a
“J”. straight stitch (middle needle position) when using
the straight stitch needle plate.
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of
the presser foot, and start sewing.
a
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance Select , or .

b
along the right edge of the presser foot with Attach the walking foot (see page 38).
selected, the width should be set to 5.5 mm (approx.
7/32 inch).

c
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) Place one hand on each side of the presser
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance foot to hold the fabric secure while sewing.

along the left edge of the presser foot with Memo


• Sew at slow to medium speed.
selected, the width should be set to 1.5 mm (approx.
• Do not sew in reverse or use stitches that
1/32 inch).
require side ways or reverse feeding.
Always check to be sure that your quilting
a
surface is securely basted before beginning
to sew. Specialized machine quilt needles
and threads are also available for machine
quilting.
J

a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

* To change the needle position, use or in


the width display.

Memo
Using a straight stitch (middle needle position)
makes it easier to sew smoothly (see page
63).

80
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Appliqué
d
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
a
Trace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric
e
and then cut around it, leaving a 3 to 5 mm Use the quilting appliqué stitch to attach
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch) seam allowance. the appliqué. Sew around the edge while
dropping the needle as close to the edge as
possible.

J
a Seam allowance: 3 to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch)
3
b
Place a piece of thick paper or stabilizer cut

Utility Stitches
to the finished size of the appliqué design
onto the fabric, and then fold over the seam
margin using an iron. Clip curves when
necessary.

c
Turn the appliqué over, and attach the thick
paper with basting pins or a basting stitch.

a Appliqué
b Needle drop position

CAUTION
• Be careful that the needle does not strike a
basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can
cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.

You can use the appliqué technique to attach


appliqué designs like the three pictured below.

a b c

a Dresden plate
b Stained glass
c Sunbonnet sue

81
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Quilting with Satin Stitches e


Set the width control to “ON”.
Use the foot controller to sew with satin stitches. If
you set the speed control slide to control the stitch
width, you can make subtle changes in the stitch
width during sewing.

a
Attach the foot controller (see page 45).

b
Select and attach presser foot “J”.

c
Press in the length display to shorten
the stitch length.

Memo
You can use the speed control slide to adjust
the stitch width. Use the foot controller to
adjust the sewing speed.

f
Press .

→ The display will return to the original screen.

g
Start sewing.
* You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by
moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever
to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.
Memo Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.
The setting will vary according to the kind of The size of the width changes equally on both sides
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a of the middle needle position.
length of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to
1/32 inch) is best for satin stitches.
a b

d
Press to use the speed control slide
to control the stitch width.
a narrower
b wider

Rough sketch (line)

h
When you are finished sewing, set the
width control back to “OFF”.

82
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Free-motion Quilting
With free-motion quilting, the feed dogs can be Memo
lowered (using the feed dog position switch) so that • When starting to sew, the internal sensor
the fabric can be moved freely in any direction. detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
For free-motion quilting, use free-motion quilting
in the machine settings screen. Press
foot “C” or free-motion open toe quilting foot “O”
depending on the stitch that is selected, and set the to display “FREE MOTION FOOT
machine to free-motion sewing mode. In this mode, HEIGHT” on P. 1 of the settings screen.
the presser foot is raised to the necessary height for Press or to select the height that
free-motion sewing. the quilting foot is raised above the fabric.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and
Increase the setting by pressing , for
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the example, when sewing very stretchy fabric,
machine. so that it is easier to sew.

Using Free-motion Quilting Foot “C”


The free-motion quilting foot “C” is used for free-
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
3
motion sewing using the straight stitch needle plate.
may be necessary to adjust the upper thread

Utility Stitches
tension. Test with a sample piece of fabric
that is similar to your chosen fabric.

a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (see
page 65).
Free-motion quilting foot “C”

CAUTION
• With free-motion quilting, control the feeding 1
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed. a Round hole
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage Memo
may result. Notice that there is a round hole in this needle
plate.
• When using free-motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate and
sew with the needle in middle (center) needle
position. If the needle is moved to any position
other than the middle (center) needle position,
the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.

83
SEWING THE STITCHES

d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
b
Press to set the machine to free-
38).
motion sewing mode.
e
Attach free-motion quilting foot “C” at the
front with the presser foot holder screw
aligned with the notch in the quilting foot.

a Presser foot holder screw


b Notch

Note
Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.

f
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
→ The key appears as , and the quilting foot is holder screw using the screwdriver with
raised to the necessary height for free-motion your left hand.
sewing.

a Presser foot holder screw

CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.

c
Select any of the following stitches.

→ Free-motion quilting foot “C” is indicated in the


upper-left corner of the screen.

84
SEWING THE STITCHES

Using Free-motion Open Toe Quilting Foot “O”


g
Lower the feed dog position switch, located
The free-motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
at the rear of the base of the machine, to for free-motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
. stitches or for free-motion quilting of straight lines
on fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches
can be sewn using free-motion open toe quilting
a
foot “O”. For details on the stitches that can be used,
refer to the “Stitch Setting Chart” at the end of this
manual.

b Free-motion open toe quilting foot “O”


c
Note
Free-motion open toe quilting foot “O” can
3
also be used with the straight stitch needle

Utility Stitches
d plate. We recommend using free-motion open
toe quilting foot “O” with free-motion sewing of
a Rear of machine fabrics of uneven thicknesses. For details on
b Feed dog position switch installing the straight stitch needle plate, refer
(as seen from the rear of the machine) to page 65. Select one of the following stitches
c Up when using the straight stitch needle plate.
d Down

h
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length. Memo
In order to sew with a balanced tension, it may
be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension (see page 50). Test with a sample
piece of quilting fabric.

a Stitch

i
Press to cancel the free-motion sewing
mode.

j
After sewing is finished, raise the feed dog

position switch to to raise the feed


dogs.

Memo
• Normally, the feed dog position switch is in
the up position.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.

85
SEWING THE STITCHES

e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
a
Press to set the machine to free-
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
motion sewing mode. holder screw using the screwdriver with
your left hand.

a Presser foot holder screw

CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.

f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
→ The key appears as , and the quilting foot is inch) in length.
raised to the necessary height for free-motion
sewing.

b
Select a stitch.

Memo
Free-motion open toe quilting foot “O” is
indicated in the upper-left corner of the
screen. When using the straight stitch needle
a Stitch
plate, free-motion quilting foot “C” is indicated.

c g
Remove the presser foot holder (see page Press to cancel the free-motion sewing
38). mode.

d
Attach free-motion open toe quilting foot
“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting Memo
foot above the needle clamp screw and Do not be discouraged with your initial results.
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot The technique requires practice.
and the presser bar.
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free-motion
1
Echo Quilting Foot “E”
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
3
motif is called echo quilting. The quilting lines,
2 which appear as ripples echoing away from the
motif, are the distinguishing characteristic of this
quilting style. Use the free-motion echo quilting foot
“E” for echo quilting. Using the measurement on the
presser foot as a guide, sew around the motif at a
a Pin fixed interval. We recommend attaching the foot
b Needle clamp screw controller and sewing at a consistent speed.
c Presser bar

Note
Make sure that the quilting foot is not slanted.

86
SEWING THE STITCHES

Free-motion echo quilting foot “E” measurement


a
Press to set the machine to free-
motion sewing mode.

a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)


b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
3
CAUTION

Utility Stitches
• With free-motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result. → The key appears as , and the quilting foot is
raised to the necessary height for free-motion
sewing.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
b
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the Select .
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
c
in the machine settings screen. Press Follow the steps on page 37 “Removing the
to display “FREE MOTION FOOT Presser Foot” to remove the presser foot.
HEIGHT” on P. 1 of the settings screen (see
d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
page 16). Press or to select the
38) and the screw.
height that the quilting foot is raised above
the fabric. Increase the setting by pressing
e
Position the free-motion echo quilting foot
, for example, when sewing very soft “E” on the left side of the presser bar with
fabric, so that it is easier to sew. the holes in the quilting foot and presser bar
aligned.

• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it


may be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension (see page 50). Test with a sample
piece of quilting fabric.

87
SEWING THE STITCHES

f
Tighten the screw with the included Finished project
screwdriver.

h
Press to cancel the free-motion sewing
mode.

CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.

g
Using the measurement on the quilting foot
as a guide, sew around the motif.

a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)

88
SEWING THE STITCHES

Blind Hem Stitches


Select from these stitches to sew the hems or cuffs of dresses, blouses, pants, or skirts.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics
0.0 2.0 1.0 - 3.5
3← - →3 NO
(0) (1/16) (1/16 - 1/8)

Blind hem stitch Hemming stretch fabric


0.0 2.0 1.0 - 3.5
stretch 3← - →3 NO
(0) (1/16) (1/16 - 1/8)

a d
Select a stitch. Attach blind hem stitch foot “R”, and lower
the presser foot. Position the fabric so the
folded edge touches the guide of the presser 3
foot.

Utility Stitches
a

a Guide
b Fold

b e
Place the fabric wrong side up, and fold and Sew the fabric, keeping the folded edge in
baste the fabric. contact with the presser foot.
a

R
c
a
b

a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)


b Basting stitches a Needle position
c Wrong side of fabric

c
Fold the fabric again.

a a

c
a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
b Wrong side of fabric
c Basting stitches

89
SEWING THE STITCHES

f
Remove the basting stitches and turn the
fabric over. Appliqué

a
Use a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue
or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to
the fabric.
* This will keep the fabric from moving during
sewing.
a b

a
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric

Memo
Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If b
the needle catches too much of the fold, the
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam a Appliqué
appearing on the right side of the fabric will be b Fabric glue
very large, leaving an unattractive finish. If you
experience either of these cases, follow the
b
instructions below to solve the problem. Select or .

■ If the Needle does not Catch the * Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to
the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see
Fold page 49).
Adjust the width so that the needle slightly catches
Memo
the fold by pressing in the width display. For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.

c
Attach presser foot “J”. Check that the
needle drops slightly off the edge of the
appliqué, then start sewing.

■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of


the Fold
Adjust the width so that the needle slightly catches
a
the fold by pressing in the width display.
a Appliqué material

a Needle drop position

90
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Sewing Sharp Curves c


To make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the
Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric fabric in half along the bias.
outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn
the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an
attractive finish to the seam.

Memo
Use a thin fabric.

Memo
Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer d
Attach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop 3
beneath the stitching area will improve the point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and

Utility Stitches
stitch placement along the edge of the start sewing.
appliqué fabric.

Shelltuck Stitches
Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of
shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch
pattern can be used for edging the neckline or
sleeves of dresses and blouses.

a
Select .

Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.
a

b
Increase the upper thread tension for an
attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck
stitches (see page 50). a Needle drop position

e
Memo Unfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one
If the upper thread tension is too weak, the side.
shelltuck stitches will not scallop.

Memo
To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar or
neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions and
then use this stitch to make a decorative finish
on the collar or neckline.

91
SEWING THE STITCHES

Scallop Stitches Top Stitching


This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the
stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed
blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem seam allowance.
accent.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
Memo foot “J”.
A temporary spray adhesive may be
b
necessary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew the With the right sides facing each other, sew
fabric before sewing a project. two pieces of fabric together, and then
press open the seam allowance.

a
Select .
c
Memo b
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this d
manual.
d
b
Attach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop a
stitches along the edge of the fabric.
* Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric. a Straight stitch
b Seam margins
c 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d Wrong side

c
Select a stitch for top stitching.

d
Place the fabric right side up in the
machine, and center the presser foot over
c
Trim along the seam, making sure not to cut the seam when sewing.
the stitches.

a Right side of fabric

Memo
Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of the
scallop stitches.

92
SEWING THE STITCHES

g
Sew the spaces between the straight seams.
Smocking Stitches
Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on
clothes, etc.
J

a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.

b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread
tension to approximately 2.0 (See pages 49
h
through 50). Pull out the straight stitch threads.

c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

d
Sew the seams, leaving approximately 3
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the

Utility Stitches
seams, then trim excess thread, leaving
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).

a
Fagoting
When there is a space between two fabrics with
thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics
together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when
sewing blouses or children’s clothes.

a
a Approximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) Baste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,
leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, and then smooth between the fabrics.
the gathers by ironing them.
a
b

a 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)


b Paper
c Basting stitches
f
Select or .

b
Select or .
Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this Memo
manual. For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.

93
SEWING THE STITCHES

c d
Attach presser foot “J”. Align the center of Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
the presser foot with the middle of the in place with basting pins.
space between the fabrics and begin
sewing.

a a Tape

e
Select or .
a Basting stitches

Memo Memo
Use a thick thread. For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.
d
When sewing is finished, gently tear the
f
paper away. Sew over the tape (or elastic).

Tape or Elastic Attaching

a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.

b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
tension to 2.0 (See pages 49 through 50).

Memo
Be sure that neither automatic reinforcement
nor automatic thread cutting is
selected.

c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin
thread to create the necessary gather.

CAUTION
Be sure the needle does not strike a basting pin, or
any other objects, during sewing. The thread
could tangle or the needle could break, causing
injury.

g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.

Memo
Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel and pull up the bobbin thread.
Holding the top and bobbin thread, pull a
length of thread out from the rear of the
machine. (Be sure that the presser foot is
raised.)

94
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Start sewing.
Heirloom Example: Illustration of finished product
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch)
Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
decorative stitching on shirt fronts.

Memo
Use a light to medium weight homespun fabric
with a little stiffness.

a
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing
needle.
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))

a
Pull out several threads from one area on a
CAUTION
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
piece of fabric to open the area.
3
* Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm
used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from
(approx. 1/8 inch) area open.

Utility Stitches
front to back. Refer to “Threading Manually”
on page 31. Using the “Automatic Threading”
button may result in damage to the machine.
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these patterns. If using a wing needle and the
stitch width has been set manually, check that
the needle will not touch the presser foot by
carefully rotating the handwheel before
starting sewing.

b
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”. Memo
* Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-25. Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.

b
Select .

Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.

c
Attach presser foot “N”. With the right side
of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the
open area.

Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of N
this manual.

95
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))


d
Press to create a mirror image of the

a
stitch. Pull out several threads from both sides of
the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which
e
Sew the opposite side to keep the stitch are not yet open.
symmetrical. * Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then
pull out four threads. The width of five threads is
approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.

b
N

c
b a

a Approx. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less


b Four threads (pull out)
c Five threads (leave)

b
Select .

Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this
manual.

c
Sew the decorative stitch in the center of
the five threads created above.

Memo
A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching
(3).

96
SEWING THE STITCHES

One-step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Narrow rounded Buttonhole on light to medium
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Wide round ended Buttonholes with extra space for


5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole larger buttons NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Tapered round Reinforced waist tapered


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
ended buttonhole buttonholes NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack in heavyweight fabrics
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
3
NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Utility Stitches
Round ended Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Round double ended Buttonholes for fine, medium to


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole heavyweight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Narrow squared Buttonholes for light to medium


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Wide squared Buttonholes with extra space for


5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole larger decorative buttons NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Squared buttonhole Heavy-duty buttonholes with


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
vertical bar tacks NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Stretch buttonhole Buttonholes for stretch or woven 6.0


3.0 - 6.0 1.0 0.5 - 2.0
fabrics (15/ NO
(1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/32 - 1/16)
64)
Heirloom buttonhole Buttonholes for heirloom and 6.0
3.0 - 6.0 1.5 1.0 - 3.0
stretch fabrics (15/ NO
(1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/1 - 1/8)
64)
Bound buttonhole The first step in making bound
5.0 0.0 - 6.0 2.0 0.2 - 4.0
buttonholes NO
(3/16) (0 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Keyhole buttonhole Buttonholes in heavyweight or


7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
thick fabrics for larger flat NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
buttons
Tapered keyhole Buttonholes in medium to heavy
7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics for larger flat NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
buttons
Keyhole buttonhole Buttonholes with vertical bar
7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
tack for reinforcement in NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
heavyweight or thick fabrics

97
SEWING THE STITCHES

One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of the presser foot to the back, as shown below.

a Reinforcement stitching

a c
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach Pull out the button holder plate on the
buttonhole foot “A”. presser foot, and insert the button that will
be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten
b
Mark the position and length of the the button holder plate around the button.
buttonhole on the fabric.
a

a Button holder plate

Memo Memo
The maximum buttonhole length is about The size of the buttonhole is decided by the
28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter + button holder plate holding the button.
thickness of the button).

98
SEWING THE STITCHES

d f
Align the presser foot with the mark on the Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
fabric, and lower the presser foot. and then start sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
a

A b

a Mark on the fabric


b Marks on the presser foot
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
Note automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
Memo
3
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole If automatic thread cutting is turned on before

Utility Stitches
foot backward as far as possible as shown in you start sewing, both threads are
the illustration, making sure that there is no automatically cut after the reinforcement
gap behind the part of the foot marked “A”. If stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
the buttonhole foot is not slid back as far as (for example, because it is too thick), increase
possible, the buttonhole will not be sewn at the stitch length setting.
the correct size.

g
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.

e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is a
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.

a b

a Basting pin
b Seam ripper

CAUTION
a Buttonhole lever
When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in the
path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and cause
injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any other
way than how it is intended.

a Metal bracket

99
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the
Memo
gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim
For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet punch
to make a hole in the rounded end of the off any excess.
buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the inside
of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam ripper
into the hole made with the eyelet punch, and
cut towards the pin.

a
Memo
After using the seam ripper to cut open the
threads over the buttonhole, trim off the
a Eyelet punch threads.
b Basting pin
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics not Fit into the Button Holder Plate
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the
When sewing on stretch fabric with or , size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot
scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
sew the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and
then set the plate at the calculated value.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the
grooves at the front of the presser foot, and
b
then temporarily tie them there.

c
d

a Presser foot scale


a
b Button holder plate
a Upper thread c Completed measurement of diameter + thickness

b
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
Memo
For example, for a button with a diameter of
15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness of
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale should be
set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).

Memo a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)


Set the width of the satin stitches to the width b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)
of the gimp thread, and set the buttonhole
width to be 2-3 times the width of the gimp
thread.

100
SEWING THE STITCHES

Four-step Buttonholes
You can sew 4-step buttonholes using the following 4 stitches together. You can sew any desired length
for the buttonhole when using 4-step buttonholes. 4-step buttonholes are a good option when attaching
oversize buttons.

Note
When changing the stitch settings for the left side of the buttonhole, make sure that all setting should be
changed to match.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
4 step buttonhole 1 Left side of 4 step buttonhole
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
(Forward stitching) NO

4 step buttonhole 2 Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole


(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
3
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO

Utility Stitches
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

4 step buttonhole 3 Right side of 4 step buttonhole


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
(Reverse stitching) NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

4 step buttonhole 4 Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.

a
Mark the position and length of the
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”, and select
buttonhole on the fabric.
stitch to sew down the left side of the

buttonhole.

a b

a Marks on fabric
b Finished stitching

101
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.

d
Sew the desired length for the buttonhole
and press the “Start/Stop” button again.

e
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and

press the “Start/Stop” button.


→ The machine will automatically stop after sewing
the bar tack.

f
Select stitch to sew up the right side of

the buttonhole, and press the “Start/Stop”


button to begin sewing.

g
Sew the right side of the buttonhole and
press the “Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same length
as the left.

h
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and

then press the “Start/Stop” button.


→ The machine will automatically sew the bar tack, tie
and stop when the bar tack is complete.

i
Raise the presser foot and remove the
fabric.

j
Refer to page 99 to open the buttonhole.

102
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other applications.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Darning Darning of medium weight fabric
7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16)

Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric


7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16)

Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the presser foot to the back as shown below.

a
3

Utility Stitches
a

a Reinforcement stitches

a c
Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot Check that the needle drops at the desired
“A”. position and lower the presser foot, making
sure the upper thread passes underneath
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the the buttonhole foot.
darning.

a
b

a Presser foot scale Note


b Completed length measurement • Pass the thread underneath the presser
c Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) foot.
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) • Set the presser foot so that there is no gap
behind the section marked with an “A” (the
Memo shaded area in the illustration below). If
The maximum length for darning is 28 mm there is a gap, the size of the darning will not
(approx. 1-1/16 inches). be correct.

103
SEWING THE STITCHES

d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.

a Buttonhole lever

a Metal bracket

e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
start the machine.

→ Once sewing is completed, the machine


automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.

Memo
If automatic thread cutting is turned on before
you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick), increase
the stitch length setting.

104
SEWING THE STITCHES

Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject to strain, such as pocket corners.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of
2.0 1.0 - 3.0 0.4 0.3 - 1.0
pocket, etc. NO
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
a
Select . towards you during sewing.

b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you wish
to sew. 3

Utility Stitches
a

b
c Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
a Presser foot scale • Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown in
b Completed length measurement
the illustration, making sure that there is no
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) gap behind the part of the foot marked “A”. If
the buttonhole foot is not slid back as far as
Memo possible, the bar tack will not be sewn to the
Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx. correct size.
3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches).
Bar tacks are usually between 5 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch).

d
Check the first needle drop point and lower
the presser foot.

a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)

105
SEWING THE STITCHES

e ■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics


Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
buttonhole foot. the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier feeding.

c b
a Presser foot
b Thick paper
c fabric

Memo
If automatic thread cutting is turned on before
a
you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
a Metal bracket stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick), increase
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and the stitch length setting.
begin sewing.

→ When sewing is completed, the machine will sew


reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.

106
SEWING THE STITCHES

Button Sewing
Buttons can be sewn on using the machine.
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Button sewing Attaching buttons
3.5 2.5 - 4.5
— — NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16)

Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting function when sewing buttons. Otherwise, you will lose the
thread ends.
3
e
Turn the handwheel to check that the
a
Select .

Utility Stitches
needle goes into each hole correctly.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
b
Raise the presser foot and detach the flat side, adjust the stitch width.
bed table attachment. * To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.

c
Lower the feed dog position switch to
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
to lower the feed dogs. start sewing.
→ The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.

Memo
a If automatic thread cutting is turned on before
you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn.

a Feed dog position switch CAUTION


d
Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the Make sure the needle does not strike the button
button along the metal plate and into the during sewing. The needle may break and cause
injury.
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.

g
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the
end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper
thread through to the wrong side of the
fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and
cut the threads.

a b

a Button
b Metal plate

107
SEWING THE STITCHES

■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons c


Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the beginning and end of sewing together on
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle the wrong side of the fabric.
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the
same way. Note
• When sewing is completed, be sure to return
the feed dog position switch to its original
position.

■ Attaching a Shank to the Button

a
Pull the shank lever toward you before
a Feed dog position switch
sewing.

d
Cut off any excess thread.

a Shank lever

b
Pull the two ends of the upper thread
between the button and the fabric, wind
them around the shank, and then tie them
firmly together.

108
SEWING THE STITCHES

Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other similar applications.

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser [mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
foot needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on
7.0 7.0 6.0 5.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 5.0
belts, etc. NO
(1/4) (1/4 15/64 3/16) (1/4) (1/4 15/64 3/16)

Star eyelet For making star-shaped eyelets


on holes. — — — — NO

d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
a
Select or .
→ When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically. 3
b
Use in either the stitch width Note

Utility Stitches
display or the stitch length display to If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments (see page 121).
choose the size of the eyelet.

e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the
center of the stitching.

a b c

(Actual size)

a Large 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)


b Medium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
c Small 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)

Note
Only one size is available for .

c
Attach monogramming foot “N”, then turn
the handwheel to check the needle drop
position.

a Needle drop position

109
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
Multi-directional Sewing start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or a
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.

a
Remove the flat bed attachment to create
the free arm function.

a Start Point

d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.

* The fabric will move sideways, so guide the fabric


by hand to keep sewing straight.

Memo
Pass the free arm through a tubular piece of
fabric, and then sew in the order shown in the
illustration.

3 1

e
2 Select and sew seam “3” as shown.

b
Select and attach monogramming foot

“N”.

→ The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.

f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown.

Memo
For details on each stitch, refer to the → The seam will be connected to the starting point of
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of this seam 1.
manual.

110
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Press the seam allowance open and attach
Zipper Insertion the zipper with a basting stitch in the
middle of each side of the zipper tape.
■ Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a

a
Select .
c c

a Basting stitches
b Zipper
c Wrong side of fabric
3
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the

Utility Stitches
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
foot.

c
a
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.

Note b
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position. a Right
b Left
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight c Needle drop position
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch (see page 67) and sew to the
top of the fabric. CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Turn the handwheel to make sure the
a
needle does not strike the presser foot. If
d another stitch is selected, the needle will strike
the presser foot, causing the needle to break
c and possibly causing injury.
b

e
Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to
3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the
a Basting stitches fabric, then remove the basting.
b Reverse stitches
c End of zipper opening
d Wrong side of fabric

111
SEWING THE STITCHES

c
Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
CAUTION zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
Make sure the needle does not strike the zipper 1/8 inch) of sewing space.
during sewing. If the needle strikes the zipper, the
needle may break, leading to injury.
a
■ Inserting a Side Zipper b
c
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.

a
Select . d
e

a Zipper pull tab


b Wrong side of fabric
c Zipper teeth
d End of zipper opening
e 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)

d
Remove presser foot “J”.

e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot
“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach
the presser foot.

c
Note a
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.

b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch and sew to the top of the b
fabric.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
c b

d
CAUTION
a When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is selected.
Turn the handwheel to make sure the needle does
not strike the presser foot. If another stitch is
a Reverse stitches selected, the needle will strike the presser foot,
b Wrong side of fabric causing the needle to break and possibly causing
c Basting stitches injury.
d End of zipper opening

112
SEWING THE STITCHES

f j
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx. Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so
1/8 inch) margin. that the left side of the pin is attached to the
presser foot holder.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening,
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
sew to a point about 50 mm (approx. should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
stop the machine. should drop on the left side of the presser foot.

h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue c
sewing to the edge of the fabric. a

a
a Right 3
b Left

Utility Stitches
c Needle drop position
a 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
presser foot touches the edge of the zipper
teeth.
CAUTION
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the
Make sure the needle does not strike the zipper zipper, then continue sewing.
during sewing. If the needle strikes the zipper, the
m
needle may break, leading to injury. Stop sewing about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and the needle in the fabric, and remove the
sew a basting stitch. basting stitches.

n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.

a
a b
d c
b
c
a Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
b Basting stitches d
c Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
d Back of the skirt (right side of fabric) a Basting stitches
b 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
c Reverse stitches
d 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)

113
SEWING THE STITCHES

114
4
Chapter 4
Character/
Decorative
Stitches
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS...............................................................................................116

■ Stitch Selection Screens....................................................................................................................................... 117


Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .............................................................................................................. 118
Alphabet Characters ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
■ Deleting Characters............................................................................................................................................. 119

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS ...................................................................................................120

Sewing Attractive Finishes ............................................................................................................................................. 120


Basic Sewing .................................................................................................................................................................. 120
Making Adjustments ...................................................................................................................................................... 121

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ..................................................................................................123

■ Key Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 123


Changing the Size .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)............................................................................................ 125
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image ................................................................................................................................... 125
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image .............................................................................................................................. 125
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ...................................................................................................................................... 125
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ............................................................................................. 126
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern...................................................................................................................... 126
Checking the Image ....................................................................................................................................................... 127

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ...........................................................................................128

Before Combining .......................................................................................................................................................... 128


Combining Various Stitch Patterns ................................................................................................................................ 128
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns ................................................................................................................... 130
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ..................................................................................................... 130
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .............................................................................................................. 131
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ................................................................................. 132
■ More Examples .................................................................................................................................................... 133

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.........................................................................................134

Stitch Data Precautions ................................................................................................................................................. 134


■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used ................................................................................................................. 134
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ................................................................................................... 134
■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be Used ............................................ 134
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data ............................................................................. 134
■ Trademarks.......................................................................................................................................................... 135
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ........................................................................................................... 136
■ If the Memory is Full............................................................................................................................................ 136
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media (Commercially Available)..................................................................................... 138
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer.......................................................................................................................... 139
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ................................................................................................. 140
Recalling from USB Media ............................................................................................................................................. 141
Recalling from the Computer......................................................................................................................................... 142
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS


Press to display the screen below.

b a c

e d f

h g i

k j l

a Decorative stitch patterns


b 7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
c Satin stitch patterns
d 7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
e Cross stitch
f Utility decorative stitch patterns
g Alphabet characters (gothic font)
h Alphabet characters (handwriting font)
i Alphabet characters (outline)
j Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 140)
k Patterns saved in USB media (see page 141)
l Patterns saved on the computer (see page 142)

Note
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the screen by pressing . While the screen is locked, no other
key can be operated.

116
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

■ Stitch Selection Screens


There are 9 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns. indicates that there is more than one

stitch selection screen for that category.

Decorative Stitch Patterns 7mm Decorative Stitch Patterns Satin Stitch Patterns

7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Cross Stitch Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns

Character/Decorative Stitches
Alphabet Characters Alphabet Characters Alphabet Characters
(Gothic Font) (Handwriting Font) (Outline)

117
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

Selecting Decorative Stitch Alphabet Characters


Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/
a
Press , or to select a
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/Cross font.
Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch
Patterns

a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to sew.

b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to sew.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

* To select a different stitch pattern, press .


When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the
new stitch pattern.

b
Press to change
the selection screen, and then enter the
characters that you want to sew.

* To enter a space, press .


* If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press , and then repeat from
step a.

→ The selected pattern is displayed.

Memo
There are three fonts for alphabet character
stitching.

118
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS

■ Deleting Characters

a
Press to delete the last character.

4
Memo

Character/Decorative Stitches
Characters are deleted individually starting
with the last character entered.

b
Select the correct character.

119
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

Sewing Attractive Finishes


To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
proper fabric/needle/thread combinations.

Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so you
should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to attach
a stabilizer material.
• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.

Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the
wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.

a c

b
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored)
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14
Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.

d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
Basic Sewing sewing.

a
Select a stitch pattern.

b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.

c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull
the upper thread out to the side, and then
lower the presser foot.

CAUTION
• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break (see “Setting the Stitch Length” on page
49).

120
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

Memo Making Adjustments


If the fabric is pulled or pushed during sewing,
the pattern may not turn out correctly. Also,
depending on the pattern, there may be Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
movement to the left and right as well as front depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the
and back. Guide the fabric with your hand to stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your
keep the fabric feeding straight and even sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches
during sewing. using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop pattern does not turn out well even after making
sewing.
adjustments based on the pattern, make
f
Press the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
button to sew reinforcement stitches. adjustments for each pattern individually.

a
Press and select on P.10.

4
Memo

Character/Decorative Stitches
• When sewing character stitches, the
machine automatically sews reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of each
character.

b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread.
the pattern.

c
Compare the finished pattern to the
Note illustration of the correct pattern below.
• When sewing some patterns, the needle will
stop in the raised position while the fabric is
fed due to the operation of the needle bar
separation mechanism which is used in this
machine. At such times, a clicking sound
different from the sound generated during
sewing will be heard. This sound is normal
and is not the sign of a malfunction.

121
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS

e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
d
Press , and then adjust the pattern
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
with the FINE ADJUST VERTI. or HORIZ. adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
displays. comes out correctly.

Memo
You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.

f
Press to return to the original
screen.

* If the pattern is bunched:


Press in the FINE ADJUST VERTI. display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.

* If the pattern has gaps:


Press in the FINE ADJUST VERTI. display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will shorten.

* If the pattern is skewed to the left:


Press in the FINE ADJUST HORIZ. display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.

* If the pattern is skewed to the right:


Press in the FINE ADJUST HORIZ. display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.

122
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

EDITING STITCH PATTERNS


■ Key Functions
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror
images, etc.

Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the displayed
keys are available when a pattern is selected.

Character/Decorative Stitches
a a
b b
cd e c e
d
f h f
g m g m
i j i l
n k n
o o
p p

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page


a Automatic Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode. 51
reinforcement stitch
key
b Automatic thread Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode. 52
cutting key

c Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the pattern. 126

d Screen lock key Press this key to lock the screen. When the screen is locked, the various 55
settings, such as the stitch width and stitch length, are locked and cannot be
changed. Press this key again to unlock the settings.
e Image key Press this key to check large combination patterns. 127

f Horizontal mirror After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror image 125
image key of the stitch pattern.

g Vertical mirror image After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror image of 125
key the stitch pattern.

h Needle mode Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing. 34
selection key
(Single/Double)

123
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page


i Single/Repeat sewing Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. 125
key

j Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose from 5 125
automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
k Size selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). 124

l Thread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density of the 126
pattern.

m Delete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete the 118, 119
mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use this key to
delete stitch patterns.
n Memory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. 136-137

o Stitch width and stitch Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern. The 49-50
length key machine has default settings.
* If mm appears, the setting cannot be adjusted.
p Thread tension key Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The machine 50
has default settings.

Changing the Size

Select a stitch pattern, then press to change the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will be
sewn in the size highlighted on the key.

Memo
• If you continue entering stitch patterns after changing the size, those patterns will also be sewn in that
size.
• You cannot change the size of combined stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is entered.

Actual Stitch Pattern Size

L S

L S

124
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

Changing the Length (for 7mm Creating a Horizontal Mirror


Satin Stitch Patterns Only) Image

When stitch patterns are selected, press to To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch
choose from 5 automatic length settings, without pattern then press .
changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch length
settings.

Character/Decorative Stitches
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image Sewing a Pattern Continuously
To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch
Press to select continuous sewing or single
pattern then press .
stitch sewing.

Memo
To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the
key while sewing. The machine will
automatically stop when the motif is finished.

125
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

Changing Thread Density Returning to the Beginning of the


(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) Pattern

After selecting the pattern, press to select When sewing character/decorative stitches, you
can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
your preferred thread density.
sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.

a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the

machine, and then press .

CAUTION
If the stitches bunch when thread density is
→ Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected
changed to , return the thread density to pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
stopped.
. If you continue sewing when the stitches
are bunched, the needle may bend or break. Memo
If this key is pressed when sewing is stopped,
patterns can be added at the end of a
Memo
combined stitch pattern. (In this example, “!” is
• Even if you select a new pattern after added.)
changing the thread density, the thread
density remains the same until you change
it.
• You cannot change thread density for a
combined pattern after the combination is
finished.

126
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS

b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
c
Press to display the enlarged image.
sewing.

Checking the Image


You can display an approximate size image of the
selected stitch pattern. You can also check and
change the colors of the image on the screen.

a
Press .

d
Use to view any part of 4
the image that extends out of the viewable

Character/Decorative Stitches
display area.

→ An image of the selected pattern is displayed.

b
Press to change the thread color in
the image.

e
Press to return to the original
screen.

Memo
• You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
• Image of some patterns will display in
default size only.
→ The color changes every time you press the button.

127
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS


You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches or satin
stitches. You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns, and others.

Before Combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the
pattern continuously, press after finishing the stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,
be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern
once the next stitch pattern is selected.

Combining Various Stitch


b
Select .
Patterns
Example:

a
Press .

128
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

c
Press .
e
Select .

→ The display returns to the stitch selection screen.


4
d f
Press . Press to sew the pattern

Character/Decorative Stitches
continuously.

* Press to view the completed pattern (see


page 127).

g
Press .

Memo
Patterns are deleted individually starting with
the last pattern entered by pressing .

129
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

c
Press to sew continuously.
Combining Large and Small
Stitch Patterns
Example:

→ The entered pattern is repeated.

Combining Horizontal Mirror


a
Press .
Image Stitch Patterns
→ The large size stitch will be selected.
Example:

b
Press again, then press to select

the small size.

→ The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.

130
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

Combining Stitch Patterns of


a
Press .
Different Length
Example:
b
Press again, then press .

Character/Decorative Stitches
a
Press , then press once.

→ The pattern is flipped horizontally.


→ The length of the image is set to .

c
Press .
b
Select again, then press 3 times.

→ The entered pattern is repeated.

→ The length of the image is set to .

131
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

Example:
c
Press .

a
Press .

b
Press .

→ The entered pattern is repeated.

Making Step Stitch Patterns (for


7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)

You can use the keys with 7mm satin


stitch patterns to create a step effect. → The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step
effect are called step stitch patterns.
c
Press again.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.

132
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS

■ More Examples
d
Press .

Press → → → → .

→ The next stitch pattern will move to the left.

e
Press .
Press → → → → →

→ → → .

Character/Decorative Stitches
Press → → → .

→ The entered pattern is repeated.

Press → → → → →

→ → → .

133
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Stitch Data Precautions


Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used
• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, only .pmu stitch data files can be used with this machine. Using
data other than that created using this machine may cause the machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Floppy disk drive
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the USB Memory Card Reader/Writer.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card

Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to
6 seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).

• When a file folder is necessary to create, use a computer.


■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be
Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP
(Windows 98SE requires a driver. Download the driver from our Web site (www.babylock.com). In addition,
only Windows 98 Second Edition can use the driver.)
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special
characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend
using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable
Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.

134
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

■ Trademarks
• Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD Card Association.
• CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
• Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• Smart Media is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
• Multi Media Card (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
• xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
• IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective
companies. However, the explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.

CAUTION
• When disconnecting the USB cable:
Before disconnecting the USB cable, click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar of
Windows® Me/2000 or the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar of Windows® XP. Then, when
the removable disk can safely be removed, disconnect the USB cable from the computer and the machine.
4

Character/Decorative Stitches
With Windows 98 SE, check that the Access lamp is not flashing before disconnecting the USB cable from
the computer and the machine.

135
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Press .
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory * Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
You can save often-used stitch patterns in the
machine’s memory. The machine’s memory can
hold up to 20 stitch patterns, each holding up to
70 entries per memory pocket.

Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.

Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch
pattern.
• See page 140 for information on retrieving a
saved stitch pattern.

a
Press .

→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern


is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.

■ If the Memory is Full


If this screen appears while you are trying to save a
pattern on the machine’s memory, the memory is
too full to hold the currently selected stitch pattern.
To save the stitch pattern in the machine’s memory,
you have to delete a previously saved stitch pattern.

a
Press .

* Press to return to the original screen


without saving.

136
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Choose a stitch pattern to delete.
d
Press .
* Press so the pattern saved in that pocket * If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press
appears.
.
* Press if you decide not to delete the stitch
pattern.

4
→ The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then

Character/Decorative Stitches
automatically saves the new stitch pattern.
a Pockets holding saved stitch patterns

c
Press .

→ A confirmation message appears.

137
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Insert the USB media into the USB port
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB connector on the machine.
Media (Commercially Available)
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to
USB media, plug the USB media into the
machine’s USB port. Depending on the type of
USB media being used, either directly plug the
USB device into the machine’s USB port or plug a
the USB Card Reader/Writer into the machine’s
USB port.

Memo b
Some USB media may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our web site for more a USB port connector for media
details.
b USB media

a
Press . Memo
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.
• Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port connector.
Otherwise, the USB media drive may be
damaged.

c
Press .

* Press to return to the original screen


without saving.

→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern


is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.

138
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Press .
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the stitch
patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and
saved on your computer.

Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.

a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB port connectors for the
computer and for the machine.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB port
connectors on the computer and machine whether
or not they are turned on.

c
Press . 4
a

Character/Decorative Stitches
* Press to return to the original screen
b
without saving.

a USB port connector for computer


b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in “My
Computer” on the computer.

Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a connector in one direction.
If it is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force and check the orientation → The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to
of the connector. “Removable Disk” under “My Computer”.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer, refer to the instruction
manual for the corresponding equipment.

139
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

d b
Select the stitch pattern’s .pmu file and Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
copy the file to the computer.
* Press so the pattern saved in that pocket
appears.
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.

Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the
“Saving” screen is showing. You may lose
the data.

Retrieving Stitch Patterns from


the Machine’s Memory
a Pockets holding saved stitch patterns

a
Press .
c
Press .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern.

→ The pocket selection screen appears.

→ The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the


sewing screen will be displayed.

140
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

d
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
Recalling from USB Media to recall.

You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either


direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder
to find the stitch pattern.

a
Insert the USB Media into the USB port
connector on the machine (see page 138).

b
Press .

e
Press .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern


will be deleted from the USB media.

Character/Decorative Stitches
→ Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.

c
Press when there is a subfolder to
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the stitch pattern in the subfolder is
displayed. → The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
* Press to return to the original screen
without recalling.

c
a

a Folder name
b Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first pattern
of any combined patterns.
c Path
→ The path shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are
displayed.

* Press to return to the previous folder.

141
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

d
Press .
Recalling from the Computer

a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB connectors for the
computer and for the machine (see page
139).

b
On the computer, open “My Computer”
then go to “Removable Disk”.

→ The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on


the selection screen.

e
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
* Press to return to the original screen
without recalling.

c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.

f
Press .

* Press to delete the stitch pattern.


The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable
Disk” folder in your computer.

→ Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to


the machine.

Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.

→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing


screen will be displayed.

Note
• The pattern recalled from the computer is only
temporarily written to the machine. It is erased
from the machine when the machine is turned
off. If you wish to keep the stitch pattern, store
it in the machine (see “Saving Stitch Patterns
in the Machine’s Memory” on page 136).

142
5
Chapter 5
Embroidery

BEFORE EMBROIDERING ............................144 Manually Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ..173

Embroidery Step by Step................................................. 144 MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS ..... 174


Attaching Embroidery Foot “W”..................................... 145 Adjusting Thread Tension ................................................174
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ....................................... 146 ■ Correct Thread Tension ..........................................................174
■ About the Embroidery Unit .................................................... 146 ■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ......................................................174
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit .............................................. 147 ■ Upper Thread is Too Loose .....................................................174
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
SELECTING PATTERNS .................................149
(END COLOR TRIM) .......................................................175
■ Copyright Information............................................................ 149 Using the Thread Trimming Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM) ....175
■ Pattern Selection Screens ....................................................... 150
■ Selecting the length of JUMP STITCH not to trim ...................176
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Floral alphabet Patterns/
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed......................................176
Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs ....................... 151
Changing the Thread Color Display.................................177
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns............................ 152
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display.........................178
Selecting Frame Patterns................................................. 153
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards...................... 154 REVISING THE PATTERN............................. 179
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately)............................. 154
Changing the Pattern Position .........................................179
Selecting Patterns from USB media/Computer ............... 154
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ................................180
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN .................155 Changing the Size ............................................................181
■ Key Functions ......................................................................... 156 Rotating the Pattern.........................................................182
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ................................183
PREPARING THE FABRIC .............................157
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (backing) to the Fabric...... 157 Patterns Only) .................................................................183
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ................. 158 Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns ......184
■ Types of Embroidery Frames .................................................. 158
■ Inserting the Fabric ................................................................ 159 USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ............. 185
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet ................................................... 160
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ................... 160 Embroidery Data Precautions ..........................................185
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics .................................................... 160 ■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used ...........................185
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners .............................................. 160 ■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used ......................185
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape ............................................... 161 ■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following
Specifications can be Used .....................................................186
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME .....162 ■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data ..........186
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data ................................................186
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame ........................................... 162 ■ Trademarks .............................................................................186
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ....163 Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory....187
■ If the Memory is Full...............................................................187
Checking the Pattern Position......................................... 163 Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media
Previewing the Completed Pattern ................................. 164 (Commercially Available) ................................................189
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer ..................190
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN .........165
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory.............191
Sewing Attractive Finishes .............................................. 165 Recalling from USB Media...............................................191
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover ............................................. 165 Recalling from the Computer ..........................................192
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ........................................... 166
■ When Threading Manually ..................................................... 167 EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS .................... 194
Sewing Embroidery Patterns Which Use Appliqué.......... 168
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1) ..............194
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2) ..............195
PROCESS.......................................................170
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ................................... 170
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing ..................................... 171
Restarting from the Beginning ........................................ 171
Automatically Resuming Embroidery When the Power
Goes Off ......................................................................... 172
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

BEFORE EMBROIDERING

Embroidery Step by Step


Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.

Step 9

Step 6, 8

Step 3

Step 4

Step 1, 2
Step 5
Step 7

Step # Aim Action Page


1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “W”. 145
2 Checking the needle* Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. * 41
3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. 146
4 Bobbin thread setup** For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. 23
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. 157
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern. 149
7 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. 162
8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. 163
9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. 29

* It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;
denim, puffy foam, etc.).
** Use the alternate bobbin case for any embroidery bobbin thread other than the recommended embroidery bobbin thread (item BBT-W,
page 7).

144
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

d
Push the black button on the presser foot
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W” holder and remove the presser foot.

a
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly b
cause injury.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot “W” when
doing embroidery. Using another presser foot
a Black button
may cause the needle to strike the presser foot,
causing the needle to bend or break and b Presser foot holder
possibly cause injury. → Remove the presser foot from the presser foot
holder.

a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
e
the needle. Use the included screwdriver to loosen the
screw of the presser foot holder, then
remove the presser foot holder.

a c
5
b

Embroidery
Press .

→ The entire screen becomes white, and all keys and a Screwdriver
operation buttons are locked. b Presser foot holder
c Presser foot holder screw
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
→ Remove the presser foot holder.

f
Position embroidery foot “W” on the
presser foot bar so that the arm of
embroidery foot “W” is behind the needle
holder and the wiper is behind the needle.

b
d

a Arm
b Needle holder
c Presser foot holder screw
d Wiper

145
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

g
Hold the embroidery foot in place with
Note
your right hand, and then use the included
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
screwdriver to securely tighten the presser with the embroidery unit attached. Set the
foot holder screw. feed dog position switch on the embroidery
unit to the appropriate setting.
• Be sure to turn off the power before
installing the embroidery unit. Otherwise, the
machine may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the embroidery
unit connection may be damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
may be damaged.
• Store the embroidery unit in the proper
storage case.
CAUTION
a
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the screw of the presser foot holder. If the the flat bed attachment.
screw is loose, the needle may strike the
presser foot and possibly cause injury.

h
Press to unlock all keys and
buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.

Attaching the Embroidery Unit


b
■ About the Embroidery Unit Open the cover of the connection port.

CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
• If the embroidery unit could not be initialized
correctly, a buzzer will sound. If this happens,
go through the initialization process again.
CAUTION
This is not a malfunction. • Be sure to replace the cover when the
embroidery unit is not installed.

146
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

c
Insert the embroidery unit connection into
the machine connection port. Push lightly
Note
until the unit clicks into place.
• A confirmation message to lower the frame-
securing lever after the carriage moves to its
initial position.

ab
c

a Embroidery unit connection


b Machine connection port • The message will disappear after
c Feed dog position switch
15 seconds or press to move to
Note the next step.
• Be sure there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If
there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit
not embroider with the correct registration.
a
• Do not push on the carriage when installing Press either or , then press
the embroidery unit onto the machine.
Moving the carriage may damage the .
embroidery unit.
• Be sure to set the feed dog position switch → The carriage will move to the removal position.
to right to lower the feed dogs. 5
CAUTION
d

Embroidery
Turn the main power to ON.
→ The following message will appear. • Always remove the embroidery frame before

pressing . Otherwise, the frame may


e
Press .
strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause
injury.
• The embroidery unit will not fit in the storage
case if this step is not done.

b
Turn the main power to OFF.

Note
• Be sure to turn off the machine before
attaching the embroidery unit, otherwise
damage to the machine may result.
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.

147
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

c
Hold down the release button, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.

a Release button

CAUTION
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.

• Be sure to close the cover of the connection


port when the embroidery unit is not being
used.

148
SELECTING PATTERNS

SELECTING PATTERNS
■ Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the sewing machine and embroidery cards are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “QUICK
REFERENCE GUIDE” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns from
the embroidery cards (sold separately).
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern type
selection screen will display.

If another screen is displayed, press to display the screen below.

Embroidery
a b

dc e
f h
g
i

a Embroidery patterns
b Alphabet character patterns
c Floral alphabet patterns
d Frame patterns
e Patterns from an embroidery card (sold separately)
f Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 191)
g Patterns saved in USB media (see page 191)
h Patterns saved on the computer (see page 192)
i Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs

149
SELECTING PATTERNS

■ Pattern Selection Screens


There are 5 categories of patterns in this machine. indicates that there is more than one pattern

selection screen for that category.

Embroidery patterns Alphabet characters Floral alphabet patterns Frame patterns

Baby Lock Exclusive


Embroidery Designs Flowers Borders Lace

Occasions Appliqué Children

Sports Animals Nancy designs

150
SELECTING PATTERNS

c
Press to create a mirror image of the
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/
Floral alphabet Patterns/ pattern as needed.
* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery key of the pattern you want to embroider.
Designs

a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to embroider.

b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider.

* Press to view the next page.

* Press to view the previous page.

d
Press .

→ The sewing screen is displayed.


5
e
Proceed to see “VIEWING THE SEWING

Embroidery
SCREEN” on page 155 to embroider the
pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another

pattern, press .

→ The selected pattern is displayed.

151
SELECTING PATTERNS

c
Press to change the
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns selection screen, and then enter the
characters that you want to embroider.

a
Press . * To enter a space, press .
* If you want to change the size of a character, select

b
Press the key of the font you want to the character and then press to change the
embroider. size. The size changes each time you press the key,
from large to medium to small.

* If you make a mistake, press to erase the


mistake.
* If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
the key to check it.

Memo
If you continue adding characters after
changing the size, the new characters will be
entered in the new size.
You cannot change the size of the entered
characters after combining character stitch
patterns.

152
SELECTING PATTERNS

d
Press . Selecting Frame Patterns

a
Press .

b
Press the key of the frame shape you want
to embroider in the top part of the screen.

a
→ The sewing screen is displayed.
b
e
Proceed to see “VIEWING THE SEWING
SCREEN” on page 155 to embroider the
pattern.
* To return to the previous screen to select another

pattern, press .
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
5
→ Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom

Embroidery
part of the screen.

c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want
to embroider.
* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
→ The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.

d
Press .

→ The sewing screen is displayed.

153
SELECTING PATTERNS

e a
Proceed to see “VIEWING THE SEWING Insert the card completely into the slot on
SCREEN” on page 155 to embroider the the right side of the machine.
pattern. * Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a
* To return to the previous screen to select another printed arrow is facing the front.

pattern, press .

b
Press .

Selecting Patterns from


Embroidery Cards
■ About Embroidery Cards
(Sold Separately)
• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this
→ The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed
machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause
on the selection screen.
your machine to operate incorrectly.

c
• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries Follow the steps on page 151 to select a
cannot be used with this machine.
pattern.
• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.
• Please see your Baby Lock retailer for
embroidery cards available. Selecting Patterns from USB
Note
media/Computer
• Only insert or remove the embroidery card
To recall patterns from the computer or USB
when is displayed, or when the media, see pages 191 through 193.
machine is turned off.
• Do not insert the card in a direction other
than that shown by the arrow on the card,
and do not force the card into the slot
strongly. Do not put any object except for the
embroidery cards into the slot. Otherwise,
your machine may be damaged.

154
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN

VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN


f g

a h
i
b

c
j

d k
e l

Embroidery
a Shows the presser foot code.
Attach embroidery foot “W” for all embroidery projects. When the foot presser symbol is displayed on the screen, you
are able to sew.
b Shows the boundary for embroidering with the extra large frame (30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches)).
c Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
d Shows the size of the selected pattern.
e Shows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).
f Shows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.
g Shows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for
changing and automatically trimming the thread).
h Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.
i Shows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.
j Shows the order the colors are sewn in.
k Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page
158).
l Shows the degree of rotation of the pattern.

* There is an explanation of each key’s function on the next page.

155
VIEWING THE SEWING SCREEN

■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can change the size of the pattern, rotate the pattern, etc.

op
n q
r
s
t vw
u x
y
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
m Image key Press this key for a preview of the sewn image. 164

n Arrow keys Press an arrow key to move the pattern in the direction shown by the arrow. 179
(Press the Center key to return the pattern to the center of the embroidery
( Center key)
area.)

o Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, 10 182
degrees or 90 degrees at a time.

p Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. 181

q Density key Press this key to change the density of alphabet character or frame patterns. 183

r Horizontal mirror Press this key to create a horizontal mirror image of the pattern. 183
image key

s Multi color key Press this key to change the color of each letter when sewing alphabet 184
character patterns.

t Memory key Saves a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a computer. 187-190

u Return key Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen. —

v Cut/Tension key Press this key to specify thread tension, automatic thread cutting, thread 174-175
trimming or the length of the jump stitch not to be trimmed.

w Forward/Back key Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the 171-173
thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning.

x Starting point key Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the 180
pattern position.

y Trial key Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves 163
to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the
pattern.

Note
• Some operations or functions are not available for certain patterns. If the key display is light gray, you
cannot use that function or operation with the selected pattern.

156
PREPARING THE FABRIC

PREPARING THE FABRIC

CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.

Note
Press , and use and in the EMBROIDERY FOOT HEIGHT display in the embroidery
settings screen to adjust the presser foot height.
To increase the space between the presser foot and the needle plate, set the embroidery foot height to a
larger number. 1.5 mm setting is used for most embroidery.

a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers than the embroidery frame being used.
(backing) to the Fabric 5

Embroidery
For best results in your embroidery projects,
always use stabilizer material for embroidery.
Follow the package instructions for the stabilizer
being used.
When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as
towel or fabrics that have loops which expand a b
when ironed) or in places where ironing is a Size of the embroidery frame
difficult, position the stabilizer material under the b Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
fabric without fusing it, then position the fabric
b
and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
with your authorized retailer for the correct wrong side of the fabric.
stabilizer to use.

CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the a
b
needle may break and cause injury. Not using a
stabilizer material may result in a poor finish a Fusible side of stabilizer
to your project. b Fabric (wrong side)

Memo
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such
as towel or corduroy, use water soluble
stabilizer (sold separately) for best results.
The water soluble stabilizer material will
dissolve completely in water, giving the
project a more attractive finish.

157
PREPARING THE FABRIC

Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame


■ Types of Embroidery Frames
Extra Large Large Medium Small

Can embroider an area Can embroider an area Can embroider an area Can embroider an area
30 cm × 18 cm 18 cm × 13 cm 10 cm × 10 cm 2 cm × 6 cm
(approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) (approx. 7 inches × 5 inches) (approx. 4 inches × 4 inches) (approx. 1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
Use when embroidering Use when embroidering patterns Use when embroidering patterns Use for embroidering names or
connected or combined between 10 cm × 10 cm (approx. under 10 cm x 10 cm very small patterns.
characters or patterns, or when 4 inches × 4 inches) and (approx. 4 inches × 4 inches).
embroidering large patterns. 18 cm × 13 cm (approx. 7 inches
× 5 inches).

Note
• Optional embroidery frame 26 cm × 16 cm (approx. 10-1/4 inches × 6-1/4 inches) can also be used.

Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Frame options are displayed on the LCD.

a b

a Can be used
b Cannot be used

CAUTION
• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.

158
PREPARING THE FABRIC

■ Inserting the Fabric c


Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,
and then remove the slack in the fabric by
Note pulling on the edges and corners. Do not
• If the fabric is placed loose in the embroidery loosen the screw.
frame, the embroidery design will sew out
poorly. Insert the fabric on a level surface,
and gently stretch the fabric taut in the
frame. Follow the steps below to insert the
fabric correctly.

a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.

Memo
When using the extra large frame, tighten the
b adjustment screws at the top and bottom of
the frame, so that the spaces at the top and
bottom of the frame are equal.
a

a Frame adjustment screw


b Inner frame

b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
Re-insert the inner frame making sure to
d
align the inner frame’s with the outer Gently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten
frame’s . the frame adjustment screw to keep the 5
fabric from loosening after stretching.

Embroidery
a * After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.

a Inner frame
b Outer frame
c Frame adjustment screw * Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.

a b

c
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric

Memo
Stretch the fabric from all four corners and all
four edges. While stretching the fabric, tighten
the frame adjustment screw.

159
PREPARING THE FABRIC

e d
Return the frame adjustment screw to its Remove the embroidery sheet.
initial position.

■ Using the Embroidery Sheet


When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the Embroidering Small Fabrics or
frame.
Fabric Edges
a
With a chalk pen, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider. Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra
support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer
a carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the
examples below. We recommend using a
stabilizer for embroidery.
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
b If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Embroidery pattern
b Mark

b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner a
frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you made
on the fabric.
b
b
a
a Fabric
b Stabilizer

■ Embroidering Edges or Corners


Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
a Inner frame adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
b Guide line

c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame
into the outer frame.

a a b

b a Fabric
b Stabilizer

a Inner frame
b Outer frame

160
PREPARING THE FABRIC

■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape


Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
adhesive.

a b

a Ribbon or tape
b Stabilizer

Embroidery

161
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME

ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME


Note
Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.

a d
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to Lower the frame-securing lever to be level
raise the presser foot. with the frame to secure the embroidery
frame in the embroidery frame holder.

a
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the
right edge of the embroidery frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever

a CAUTION
• If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the
embroidery pattern may not sew out correctly
or the presser foot may strike the embroidery
b
frame and cause injury.

■ Removing the Embroidery Frame


a Embroidery frame holder
a
b Embroidery frame guide
Raise the frame-securing lever.

c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder,
making sure to align the embroidery frame’s
with the holder’s .

b
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
a

a Arrow mark

162
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION


The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame.
You can check the layout before starting embroidery and change the position.

Checking the Pattern Position b


From , press the key for the position

The embroidery frame moves and shows the that you want to check.
pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make
sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.

a
Press .

5
a Selected position

Embroidery
→ The needle will move to the selected position on the
pattern.

Memo
→ The following screen is displayed. To see the entire embroidering area, press
. The embroidery frame moves and
shows the embroidery area.

CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.

c
Press .

163
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION

c
Press to return to the original
Previewing the Completed
Pattern screen.

a
Press .

→ An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered


appears.

b
Press to select the frame

used in the preview.


* Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.

* Press to see a full screen preview.


* The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
following display.

Memo
You can begin sewing from this screen by
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.

164
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

Sewing Attractive Finishes


There are many factors that go into sewing beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate stabilizer (see
page 157) and hooping the fabric in the frame (see page 158) are two important factors mentioned earlier.
Another important point is the appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the explanation
of threads below.

Thread Upper thread Rayon, polyester, or cotton embroidery thread is recommended for use with this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not yield optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for use with this machine.
When using other kinds of embroidery bobbin thread, use the alternate bobbin case (pink screw) included
with this machine (the bobbin case originally installed in the machine has a green screw). (See page 226 for
how to remove the bobbin case.)

Memo
If you use threads other than those listed above, the embroidery may not sew out correctly.

Note
• Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the embroidery frame. The frame may strike the object
and cause a poor finish to the embroidery pattern.
• When embroidering on large garments (especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not let the fabric
hang over the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the pattern may not turn
out as planned.
5

Embroidery
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
CAUTION
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the • Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
included embroidery needle plate cover to the as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
projections on the underside of the cover into the may cause the needle to break.
notches on the needle plate as shown below.

a
Note
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate
cover for any applications other than
embroidery.
b

a Groove
b Projection
c Notch

To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place


your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.

165
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

c
Trim the excess thread at the start of the
Sewing Embroidery Patterns color. If the end of the thread is under the
presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
trim the excess thread.

Example:

b a

d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
→ When the first color is completely sewn, the machine
will automatically trim the threads and stop. The
presser foot will then automatically be raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.

Memo
If there is thread left over from the beginning
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making it
a Embroidery color order very difficult to deal with the thread after the
b Cursor pattern is finished. Trim the threads at the
beginning.
Memo
e
The [+] cursor moves over the pattern, Remove the thread for the first color from
showing which part of the pattern is being the machine. Thread the machine with the
sewn. next color.

a
Thread the machine with the first color (see
“Threading Using the “Automatic
Threading” Button” on page 29).

b
Lower the presser foot, then press the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.

166
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

f ■ When Threading Manually


Repeat the same steps for embroidering the
remaining colors.
a
Thread the machine manually with the first
color (see “Threading Manually” on page
31).

b
Lower the presser foot, then press the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
→ When the last color is sewn, “Finish sewing” will
c
Trim the excess thread at the start of the
appear on the display. Press , and the color. If the end of the thread is under the
display will return to the original screen. presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
trim the excess thread.
Memo
The Thread Trimming Function is originally set
to trim excess thread jumps (threads linking
parts of the color steps, etc.). Depending on
5
the type of thread and fabric that are used, an

Embroidery
end of the upper thread may remain on the
surface of the fabric at the beginning of the
stitching. After embroidering is finished, cut off
this excess thread.
*If the setting has been turned off, trim the
excess thread jumps using scissors after the
pattern is finished.
See page 175 for information on the thread
trimming function. Memo
If there is thread left over from the beginning
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making it
very difficult to deal with the thread after the
pattern is finished. Trim the threads at the
beginning.

d
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to
restart the machine.

e
Repeat steps d and e from the previous
section.

167
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

c
Remove the appliqué material from the
Sewing Embroidery Patterns embroidery frame, and then cut carefully
along the stitching. After cutting, remove all
Which Use Appliqué of the stitching thread carefully.
There are some patterns which call for an appliqué * Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just
sewed. Do not cut inside the stitching line, as the
inside the pattern. Prepare the base fabric and the
appliqué fabric will not be caught by the appliqué
appliqué fabric (appliqué piece).
stitch.
When sewing an embroidery pattern with an
appliqué, the color sewing order display shows
“Appliqué Material”, “Appliqué Position”,
“Appliqué”, and then the sewing order of the
colors around the appliqué.

Memo
Depending on the thread color display setting,
the display may show ,

, or .
d
Place the base material into the embroidery
frame.
a
Attach an iron-on stabilizer to the wrong
side of the appliqué material.

b
a Base material

e
a Appliqué material (cotton, felt, etc.) Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew the
b Iron-on stabilizer position of the appliqué.
* Use the same thread color you plan to use when
b
Place the appliqué material into the
attaching the appliqué in step g.
embroidery frame, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to sew the outline of
the appliqué.

a
b

a Position of appliqué
b b Base material

a Outline of appliqué → The machine will sew around the position of the
appliqué and will then stop.
b Appliqué material

Memo
The embroidery procedure is the same as the
basic procedure explained on pages 166
through 167.

→ The machine will sew around the outline of the


appliqué pieces and will then stop.

168
SEWING AN EMBROIDERY PATTERN

f
Apply a thin layer of adhesive or spray
adhesive to the back of the appliqué piece
and attach it to the appliqué position so that
it follows the seam of the outline.

Memo
If the appliqué material is a lightweight fabric,
you may want to use a fusible web on the back
to stabilize the fabric and for appliqué
placement. Fuse appliqué in place with an
iron.
Do not remove fabric from the frame to iron
the appliqué material.

g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.

Embroidery
Memo
Some patterns may not show all three
appliqué steps. Sometimes the “Appliqué”
step will be shown as a color.

→ The appliqué will then be completed.

h
Change the upper thread and then carry out
the rest of the embroidering.

Memo
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern and then
clean away the glue.
• For best sewing results clip all threads
between color steps.

169
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS


Note
• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching the
embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.

b
Unlock the frame-securing lever and
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread remove the embroidery frame.
* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
during embroidering, the machine will stop and frame.
the message below will appear. Press and
follow the directions below to rethread the lower
threading. If very little sewing remains, you can
embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing . The machine will
stop after sewing the 10 stitches.

c
Insert a wound bobbin into the machine.
(See page 26 for Setting the bobbin.)

a
Press .

d
Press .

→ After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage


will move.

→ The carriage will return to its original position.

e
Attach the embroidery frame.

f
To return to the spot in the pattern where
you stopped sewing, follow steps c
through f in the next section.

170
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

e
Press to return to the original
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing
screen.

a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
f
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
machine. lower the presser foot, and press the “Start/
Stop” button to continue sewing.
b
If the upper thread is broken, redo the
upper threading. If the bobbin thread is Restarting from the Beginning
broken, press and follow the

a
directions in steps a through e from the Press .
previous section to reset the bobbin.

c
Press .

Embroidery
b
Press .
d
Press , , or to move the
needle back the correct number of stitches
before the spot where the thread broke.
* If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, press to select the color and
move to the beginning position of that color, then
use , , or to move ahead to
slightly before where the thread broke.

→ The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle


to the pattern’s beginning position.

c
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.

171
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
Automatically Resuming embroidering.
Embroidery When the Power
Goes Off a

The current color, stitch number and design


position are saved when the power is interrupted
during embroidering. The next time that the
machine is turned on, you can resume
embroidering.

Memo
Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the point
where embroidery was stopped when the
machine is turned on again.

Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your a Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
design.

a
Turn the main power to ON.

b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen
and remove the embroidery frame.
→ The following message will appear.

c
Attach the embroidery frame and press

→ The previous sewing screen displayed before the


machine was turned off appears.

Memo
If you want to start a new operation, press
so the pattern selection screen
appears.

172
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS

c
Use , , or to advance the
Manually Resuming Embroidery
After Turning Off the Power pattern to slightly before where sewing
stopped.
Example: If the power is turned off while
sewing the second color

a
Select the pattern and press .

d
Press to return to the original

screen.

e
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to 5
lower the presser foot and press the “Start/
b
Press to move the second color to the

Embroidery
Stop” button to start sewing.
first position in the display.
Note
• To continue a pattern that has had its
position changed (see page 179), move the
pattern the same amount in the layout
display screen, then follow the steps above.
In this case, you need to make a note of the
pattern’s position before turning off the
power.

Memo
Use the display to remember the
last stitch number sewn before you turn off the
power. Then use the , , or
keys to move the pattern to the same stitch
number and continue sewing.

173
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

a
Press .
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be
set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on
the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the
fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the
pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or
the thread may break.

(Right side) (Wrong side)

b
Follow the operations described below to adjust Press to weaken the upper thread
thread tension according to the situation. tension. (The tension number will
decrease.)
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made
extremely weak, the machine may stop
during sewing. This is not the sign of a
malfunction. Increase the thread tension
slightly, and begin sewing again.

Memo
• If you turn the main power to OFF or select a
different pattern, the thread tension will reset
to the automatic setting.
c
• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the
Press .
thread tension setting will be the same as
when the pattern was saved. ■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,
or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting
in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side
of the fabric.

(Right side) (Wrong side)

a
Press .
(Right side) (Wrong side)

b
Press to tighten the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will increase.)

c
Press .

174
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Using the Automatic Thread


Cutting Function Function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
(END COLOR TRIM)

The automatic thread cutting function will automatically trim any excess thread jumps within
the color. This function is initially turned on. To
cut the thread at the end of sewing each color.
This function is initially turned on. To turn this turn this function off, press key and then
function off, press key and then . This . This function can be turned on or off
function can be turned on or off during during embroidering.
embroidering. * Your customized setting remains after turning off
and on the machine.
* This setting returns to its default
when the machine is turned off.

a
Press .
The automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM) will cut the thread at the end of one color sewing. This function is initially turned on. To turn this function off, press (TENSION/CUT) key and then (END COLOR TRIM).

a
a
a Jump stitch
5
Note

Embroidery
• When this function is turned on, use the
enclosed ball point needle HA × 130 for
embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters. Using
other needles may cause the thread to
break.

a
b
Press to turn off END COLOR TRIM.

→ The key will display as


* When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
stop without cutting the thread.

175
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

b
Press to turn off JUMP STITCH
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
TRIM.

a
Press and Embroidery.

b
In the MAX EMBROIDERY SPEED display,

use to change the maximum


embroidery speed.
→ The key will display as
* You can choose from 3 different speed levels.
* The machine will not trim the thread before moving
to the next stitching.

■ Selecting the length of JUMP


STITCH not to trim
When the thread trimming function is
turned on, you can select the length of the jump
stitch not to trim the thread. This function can be
turned on or off during embroidering.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm
increments.
* Your customized setting remains after turning off
and on the machine.
Press or to select the length of JUMP
STITCH.

For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch)


and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of
25 mm or less before moving to the next stitching. Memo
• SPM is the number of stitches sewn in one
minute.
• Decrease the sewing speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics.
• The sewing speed can be changed while
embroidery is being sewn.
• The maximum sewing speed setting does
not change until a new setting is selected.
The setting specified before the main power
Note is set to OFF remains selected the next time
• If design has many trims it is recommended that the machine is turned on.
to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in • Decrease the sewing speed to 600 spm
order to reduce the amount of excess tails when using a speciality thread like a metallic
on backside of fabric. thread.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length

c
selected, the fewer number of times the Press .
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.

176
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

d
When the thread number #123 is
Changing the Thread Color
Display displayed, use to select from six
embroidery thread brands pictured below.
You can display the name of the thread colors, the
time or embroidery thread number.

Memo
Colors on the screen may vary slightly from
actual spool colors.

a
Press .

b
Press .

c
In the THREAD COLOR DISPLAY, use

to display the name of the thread


colors, the time or the embroidery thread
number.

EMBROIDERY/POLYESTER
THREAD#

5
COUNTRY/COTTON THREAD#

Embroidery
MADEIRA/POLYESTER
THREAD#

MADEIRA RAYON THREAD#

SULKY/POLYESTER THREAD#

ROBISON-ANTON/POLYESTER
THREAD#

e
Press .

177
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS

Changing the Embroidery Frame


Display a

a
Press .

b
Press .
c

c
In the FRAME DISPLAY, use to

change the embroidery frame display mode.


* There are 10 choices.

a Extra large frame embroidering area


b Center line
c Large frame embroidering area
d Medium frame embroidering area
e Small frame embroidering area
f Grid lines

d
Press .

178
REVISING THE PATTERN

REVISING THE PATTERN

CAUTION
• When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an
appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may
strike the frame and possibly cause injury.

The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.


Changing the Pattern Position If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to
position the pointer on the desired pattern, and
then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can
Use to move the pattern in the direction also be dragged by selecting it directly in the
screen with your finger or the touch pen.
shown by the arrow.

Press to center the pattern. Memo


• Patterns cannot be moved in screens where

does not appear.

• If in the Embroidery Edit screen is


pressed to display an enlargement of the
pattern, the pattern cannot be moved by
5
dragging it. Press in the screen to

Embroidery
move the pattern.
a

a Distance from the center

179
REVISING THE PATTERN

Aligning the Pattern and the


Needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a
pattern and the needle

ABC

a
Mark the embroidery start position on the
fabric, as shown.

b
Press .

180
REVISING THE PATTERN

b
Select the direction in which to change the
c
Press .
size.

* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.

* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.

* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.

a * Press to compact the pattern horizontally.

* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.

* Press to compact the pattern vertically.


a Start position
* Press to return the pattern to its original
→ The needle position moves to the bottom left corner appearance.
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).

d
Press .

e
Use to align the needle and the

mark on the fabric, and begin embroidering


the pattern.
a

Embroidery
a Size of the pattern

Changing the Size

a
Press .

Memo
• Some patterns or characters can not be
enlarged more than others.
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged to a greater degree if they are
rotated 90 degrees.
• Some copyright or licensed patterns and
characters can not be enlarged or reduced.

c
Press to return to the original screen.

181
REVISING THE PATTERN

b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
Rotating the Pattern
* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
left.

a
Press . * Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
right.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
right.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
right.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
position.

a Degree of rotation

c
Press to return to the original
screen.

182
REVISING THE PATTERN

Creating a Horizontal Mirror Changing the Density


Image (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only)
Press so it appears as to create a
horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. The thread density for some alphabet character
and frame patterns can be changed.
Press again to return the pattern to normal.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%
increments can be specified.

a
Press .

Embroidery

183
REVISING THE PATTERN

b
Change the density.
Changing the Colors of Alphabet
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
Character Patterns
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
Combined alphabet character patterns can be
sewn with each letter in a different color. If
“MULTI COLOR” is set, the machine stops after
each character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.

a
Press so that it appears as .

* Press the key again to return to the original setting.

c a b

b
a Normal After a character is sewn, change the thread
b Fine thread (stitches closer together) color, and then sew the next character.
c Coarse thread (stitches farther apart)
→ The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.

c
Press to return to the pattern
selection screen.

184
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

Embroidery Data Precautions


Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this
machine.

CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.

■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used


• Only .pes,.pha,.phb,.phc, and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other
than that saved using our data design systems or sewing machines may cause the embroidery machine to
malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Floppy disk drive
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory).
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
5

Embroidery
You can also use the following types of USB media with the USB Memory Card Reader/Writer.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
• Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• XD-Picture Card

Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to
6 seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).

Memo
• When a file folder is necessary to create, use a computer.
• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a
number appear as the file name.

185
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

■ Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be


Used
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP
(Windows 98SE requires a driver. Download the driver from our Web site (www.babylock.com). In addition,
only Windows 98 Second Edition can use the driver.)
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains
special characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We
recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
• If embroidery data larger than 300 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) (approx.12 inches (H) × 7 inches (W)) is selected, a
message is shown asking if you wish to rotate the pattern 90 degrees.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 300 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) (approx.
12 inches (H) × 7 inches (W)) cannot be used. (All designs must be within the 300 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)
(approx. 12 inches (H) × 7 inches (W)) design field size.)
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be
displayed. Use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets the
specifications.
• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in
“Removable Disk”, that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will manage embroidery data.
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed). Only the
first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default
thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
■ Trademarks
• Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD Card Association.
• CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
• Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• Smart Media is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
• Multi Media Card (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
• xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
• IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its
proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective
companies. However, the explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.

CAUTION
• When disconnecting the USB cable:
Before disconnecting the USB cable, click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar of
Windows® Me/2000 or the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar of Windows® XP. Then, when
the removable disk can safely be removed, disconnect the USB cable from the computer and the machine.

With Windows 98 SE, check that the Access lamp is not flashing before disconnecting the USB cable from
the computer and the machine.

186
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Press .
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory * Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
You can save embroidery patterns that you have
customized and will use often; for example, your
name, patterns that have been rotated or had the
size changed, patterns that have had the sewing
position changed, etc. You can save up to 20
patterns.

Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.

Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to
the machine’s memory.
• See page 191 for information on retrieving a
saved pattern.

a
Press when the pattern you want to → The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
save is in the sewing screen. automatically.

■ If the Memory is Full


If the screen below displays, either the maximum 5
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern

Embroidery
you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the
machine cannot save it. If you delete a previously
saved pattern, you can save the current pattern.

a
Press .

* Press to return to the original screen


without saving.

→ The machine displays the patterns currently saved.

187
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Select the pattern you want to delete.
d
Press .

* If you decide not to delete the pattern, press


.

c
Press .

→ The “Saving” screen displays. When the pattern is


saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.

Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.

Memo
• If there is enough memory available after
a deleting the pattern, the pattern you want to
b save will be saved automatically. If there is
not enough memory available after deleting
the pattern, repeat the steps above to delete
another pattern from the machine’s memory.
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.
a Amount of memory used by the pattern to be • See page 191 for more information about
deleted retrieving saved patterns.
b Amount of memory needed to save the current
pattern

188
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Insert the USB media into the USB port
Saving Embroidery Patterns to connector on the machine.
USB Media
(Commercially Available)
When sending embroidery patterns from the
machine to USB media, plug the USB media into
a
the machine’s USB port. Depending on the type of
USB media being used, either directly plug the
USB device into the machine’s USB port or plug
the USB Card Reader/Writer into the machine’s
USB port. b

a USB port connector for media


Memo
b USB media
Some USB media may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our web site for more
Memo
details.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.

a
Press when the pattern you want to • Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port connector.
save is in the sewing screen. Otherwise, the USB media drive may be
damaged.

c
Press .

* Press
without saving.
to return to the original screen
5

Embroidery

→ The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the pattern


is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.

189
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

b
Press when the pattern you want to
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Computer save is in the sewing screen.

Using the included USB cable, the machine can


be connected to your computer, and the
embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved
from and saved in your computer.

Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving” screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.

a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB port connectors for the
computer and for the machine.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB port
connectors on the computer and embroidery
machine whether or not they are turned on.

c
a Press .

* Press to return to the original screen


b
without saving.

a USB port connector for computer


b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in “My
Computer” on the computer.

Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a connector in one direction.
If it is difficult to insert the connector, do not → The pattern will be temporarily saved to
insert it with force. Check the orientation of “Removable Disk” under “My Computer”.
the connector.

d
• For details on the position of the USB port Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the Disk” and copy the file to the computer.
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.

190
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

c
Retrieving Patterns from the Press .

Machine’s Memory

a
Press .

→ The sewing screen is displayed.

Recalling from USB Media

→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from
either direct USB media or a folder in the USB
memory.
media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each 5
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to folder to find the embroidery pattern.

Embroidery
retrieve.
a
Insert the USB media into the USB port
* Press to return to the original screen. connector on the machine (see page 189).

b
Press .

→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are


displayed.

191
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

c e
Press when there is a subfolder to Press .
sort two or more stitch patterns to USB
media, the embroidery pattern in the
subfolder is displayed.

* Press to return to the original screen


without recalling.

c
a

→ The sewing screen is displayed.


b
Recalling from the Computer

a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB port connectors for the
a Folder name
computer and for the machine (see page
b Embroidery patterns in a folder
190).
c Path

b
→ The path shows the current folder at the top of the On the computer, open “My Computer”
list. then go to “Removable Disk”.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.

* Press to return to the previous folder.

d
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.

* Press to return to the original screen.

192
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

c e
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable Press the key of the pattern you want to
Disk”. recall.

* Press to return to the original screen.

→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the


machine.

Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.

d
Press .

f
Press .

Embroidery
→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the
selection screen.
→ The sewing screen is displayed.

193
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
Using a Frame Pattern to Make temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the
appliqué created in step a. Attach the
an Appliqué (1) appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.

a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the outside
of the shape.

d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over
the appliqué and base fabric from step c to
create the appliqué.

Note
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a of the size and location.
onto the base fabric.

a Appliqué material

194
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS

d
Remove the embroidery frame from the
Using a Frame Pattern to Make embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches.
an Appliqué (2)
This is a second method to make appliqué using
embroidery patterns. You do not have to change
the fabric in the embroidery frame using this
method. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.

a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.

Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull
strongly on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric
may loosen in the frame.

e
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué.

Embroidery
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step a.
* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the seam.

Note
• Do not change the size or position of the
pattern.

f
Reattach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery unit, and embroider the satin
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué stitch pattern to create an appliqué.
fabric.

195
BEFORE EMBROIDERING

196
6
Chapter 6
Embroidery Edit

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS.......................................................198

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT .......................................................199


Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Floral Alphabet Patterns/Frame Patterns/
Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs ..............................................................200
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns ..................................................................200
EDITING PATTERNS..........................................................................203
■ Key Functions ................................................................................................................204
Moving the Pattern................................................................................................205
Rotating the Pattern ..............................................................................................205
Changing the Size of the Pattern ...........................................................................206
Deleting the Pattern ..............................................................................................207
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character Patterns.................................207
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing ..................................................................207
Reducing Character Spacing .................................................................................208
Changing the Color of Each Alphabet Character in a Pattern................................209
Changing the Thread Color ...................................................................................209
Creating a Custom Thread Table ...........................................................................210
■ Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ............................................211
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table .................................................212
Designing Repeated Patterns.................................................................................213
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns .............................................................................................213
■ Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern ..............................................................215
■ Assigning Thread Marks.................................................................................................216
After Editing ..........................................................................................................217
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns....................................................................................218

COMBINING PATTERNS...................................................................219
Editing Combined Patterns ....................................................................................219
■ Selecting combined embroidery patterns ......................................................................222
Sewing Combined Patterns....................................................................................222
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ...................................................223
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS

EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS
With the Embroidery Edit functions, you can combine embroidery patterns and character patterns,
change the size of patterns, rotate patterns, and perform many other editing functions. This machine can
perform the 9 functions listed below.

■ Combine Patterns
You can easily create combinations of embroidery patterns, frame patterns, character patterns, patterns from the machine’s
memory, patterns from separately sold embroidery cards, and many other patterns.

■ Move Patterns
Within the 30 cm × 18 cm (approx. 12 inches × 7 inches) wide embroidery area, you can change the position of patterns, and
check the position on the LCD.

■ Rotate Patterns
You can rotate patterns one degree, ten degrees or ninety degrees at a time.

■ Enlarge or Reduce Patterns


You can make patterns larger or smaller.

• This function is not available for some patterns.

■ Create Mirror Images


You can create horizontal mirror images.

• This function is not available for some patterns.

■ Change Alphabet Character Spacing


You can increase or decrease the spacing between characters in combined patterns.

■ Change Alphabet Character Layout/Array


You can change the layout of the characters to a curved line, diagonal, etc. There are 6 choices total.

■ Change the Thread Colors of Patterns


You can change the thread colors of the pattern to your favorite colors.

■ Creating a Repeating Pattern


You can add copies of a pattern to create a pattern that repeats in a vertical or horizontal direction.

198
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT


Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the instructions on page 144, and press to
display the screen below.

a b
c e
d
f
g h
i

a
b
Embroidery patterns
Alphabet character patterns
6
c Floral alphabet patterns

Embroidery Edit
d Frame patterns
e Patterns from an embroidery card (sold separately)
f Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 191)
g Patterns saved in USB media (see page 191)
h Patterns saved on the computer (see page 192)
i Baby Lock Exclusive Embroidery Designs

Memo
See page 150 for more information on each category’s selection screen.

Note
You can also sew Utility Stitches or Character/Decorative Stitches with the embroidery unit attached by
pressing or (a confirmation message for moving the carriage will appear). Raise the
feed dogs, and then attach the appropriate presser foot before sewing.

199
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

d
Proceed to see “EDITING PATTERNS” on
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/ page 203 to edit the pattern.
Floral Alphabet Patterns/Frame
Patterns/Baby Lock Exclusive
Embroidery Designs

a
Select the category of the pattern.

b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
edit.
* See pages 151 and 153 for more information on
selecting patterns.
→ The pattern is displayed in the top part of the screen.

c
Press .

Selecting Alphabet Character


Patterns
When you select character patterns from the
embroidery edit screen, you can edit the
appearance of the pattern at the same time.

a
Press .

→ The pattern selected for editing is outlined in red on


the embroidery edit display.

200
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

b
Select the font, then enter the characters.
d
Select the layout. (Example: )
(Example: A B C D)
* See page 152 for more information about selecting When selecting an arc, use and
characters. to change the degree of the arc.
* Press to make the arc flatter.

* Press to make the arc rounder.

Memo
When selecting , and

change to and . You can


increase or decrease the incline.

c
Press to change the layout of the
pattern.
* If the characters are too small to see, press to
view a display of all entered characters.

Embroidery Edit

201
SELECTING PATTERNS TO EDIT

e
Press to return to the original
screen.

f
After you finish your selections, press

→ The embroidery edit screen will appear.

g
Proceed to see “EDITING PATTERNS” on
page 203 to edit the pattern.

202
EDITING PATTERNS

EDITING PATTERNS

a a
b d b d
c e c e

a Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.


b Shows the size of the pattern currently selected.
c Shows the distance from the center of the frame.
d Shows the number of colors in the pattern currently selected.
e Shows the degree of rotation for the pattern.

Memo
If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.

Embroidery Edit

203
EDITING PATTERNS

■ Key Functions
c
d

e
a f
g
h
i
j
b k
l
n
m
o

No. Display Key Name Explanation Page


a Arrow keys Press these keys to move the pattern in the direction indicated by the arrow on 205
( Center key) the key. (Press to return the pattern to its original position.)

b Border key Press this key to make a repeating pattern. 213

c Zoom key Press this key for precise design placement. 221
You can zoom a pattern, 100% or 200%.

d Image key Press the key for a preview of the sewn image. 164

e Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten 205
degrees or ninety degrees at a time.

f Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or 206
reduced.

g Density key Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns. 183

h Horizontal mirror Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. 183
image key

i Character spacing key Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. 207

j Array key Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern. 207

k Multi color key Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern. 209

l Thread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. 209

m Pattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the —
pattern to edit.

n Delete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red 207
box).

o Edit end key Press this key to continue to the next step. 217

204
EDITING PATTERNS

b
Select the angle by which the pattern is
Moving the Pattern rotated.

* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the


Press to move the pattern in the direction left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the
shown on the key.
right.
Press to return the pattern to the center.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the
right.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
left.
* Press to rotate the pattern 1 degree to the
right.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
a position.

a Distance from the center

Rotating the Pattern


a

a
Press . 6

Embroidery Edit
a Degree of the pattern’s rotation

205
EDITING PATTERNS

b
Select the direction in which to change the
c
Press to return to the original
size.
screen.
* Press to enlarge the pattern proportionately.

* Press to shrink the pattern proportionately.

* Press to stretch the pattern horizontally.

* Press to compact the pattern horizontally.

* Press to stretch the pattern vertically.

* Press to compact the pattern vertically.

* Press to return the pattern to its original


appearance.

Changing the Size of the Pattern


a

a
Press .

a Shows the size of the pattern being edited.

c
Press to return to the original
screen.

206
EDITING PATTERNS

b
Press the key of the layout you want to
Deleting the Pattern embroider.
* See page 201 for more information about layout
types.
Press to delete the pattern from the screen.

→ The display will show the selected layout.

Changing the Configuration of c


Press .
Alphabet Character Patterns
Changing Alphabet Character
a
Press . Spacing

a
Press . 6

Embroidery Edit

207
EDITING PATTERNS

b
Use or to change the spacing.
Reducing Character Spacing
* Press to widen the character spacing.
The spacing between characters can be reduced to
* Press to tighten the character spacing. 50% of the narrowest character in the group.

* Press to return the pattern to its original


Note
appearance. • It is not recommended to edit data and
transfer to other or older version machines.
Same features do not apply in other
machines, so problems may occur.
• Character spacing can be reduced only
when characters are arranged normally on a
straight line.

c
Press to return to the original
screen.

208
EDITING PATTERNS

Changing the Color of Each Changing the Thread Color


Alphabet Character in a Pattern
You can change the thread color by moving the
color to be changed to the top of the sewing order
and selecting a new color from the thread colors in
a
Press so you can assign a thread the machine.
color to each character.
a
Press .

b
Change the thread to sew each character in
a different color. → The thread color palette screen displays.

* Press to change the colors in the sewing


b
Press or to put the color you want
order (see page 209).
to change at the top of the sewing order. 6

Embroidery Edit
a

a Color for each character

209
EDITING PATTERNS

c
Press to choose a new
Creating a Custom Thread Table
color from the color palette.
You can create a custom thread table containing
* To return to the original color, press . If the thread colors that you most often use. You can
multiple colors have been changed, this command select thread colors from the machine’s extensive
will return all colors to their original colors. list of thread colors from nine different thread
* You can select colors from the color palette by brands. You can select any color and move the
directly touching the color selection with the touch color to your custom thread table.
pen.
Note
• 300 Robison-Anton polyester thread colors
have been added to the custom thread table
for your convenience.
• You have the option to completely clear, or
to restore the Custom Thread Table to the
original factory setting. Visit the website for
Custom Thread Table Clear/Restore
Program and instructions.

a
Press , and then press .

Press to display P. 5.
a
b
Use to select where to

add or change a color on the custom thread


table.
a Color palette
* You can also touch the palette directly with the
→ The selected color appears at the top of the sewing touch pen.
order. * You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using

d
Press . and on the custom thread table.

a Custom thread table


a Color palette/Custom thread table change key Memo
→ The display shows the changed colors.
is pressed to download future color data.
Memo For information, visit the Web site.
To select a color from the Custom Thread
Table, see “Choosing a Color from the Cus-
tom Thread Table” on page 212.

210
EDITING PATTERNS

f
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
c
Use to select one of the thread
thread colors are specified.
brands in the machine. * To delete a specified color from the palette, select
the color and press .
d
Use

g
to enter a color’s 4-digit number. Press to return to the original

* If you make a mistake, press to erase the


screen.
entered number, and then enter the correct number.

■ Adding a Color to the Custom


a Thread brand
Thread Table from the List
e a
Press . Repeat the previous steps a through c.

6
b
Press to display the thread list.

Embroidery Edit
c
Use to select a thread color.

b
a

a Thread brand
b a
b Entered number
→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread
table.

Note a Thread list


• If is not pressed, the thread color b Thread brand
number will not be changed.

211
EDITING PATTERNS

d b
Press . Press or to put the color you want
to change at the top of the sewing order.
e
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, press
.

f
Press to return to the original
screen.

Choosing a Color from the


Custom Thread Table
You can select a color from the up to 300 thread
colors you have set in the custom thread table.

a
Press .

c
Press .

→ The thread color palette screen displays.

a Color palette/Custom thread change key


b Color palette
→ The custom thread table will appear.

212
EDITING PATTERNS

d
Press to choose a new
Designing Repeated Patterns
color from the custom thread table.
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns
* Use and to scroll through the custom
Using the border function, you can create stitches
thread table. using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the
* Press to return to the original color. spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern
stitch.
* You can select colors from the custom thread table
by directly touching the screen with the touch pen.

a
Select a pattern, and then press .

b
Press .

a Custom thread
b Custom thread table
→ The display shows the changed colors.

e
Press . 6

Embroidery Edit

213
EDITING PATTERNS

c e
Select the direction in which the pattern Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
will be repeated.
* To widen spacing, press .

* To tighten spacing, press .

a
b

d
c

a Vertical direction
b Horizontal direction
c Repeating and deleting keys
d Spacing keys Memo
You can only adjust the spacing of patterns
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
enclosed in the red frame.
depending on the direction selected.

f
Complete repeated patterns by repeating
d
Use to repeat the pattern on top and steps c through e.
to repeat the pattern at the bottom.
g
Press to finish repeating.
* To delete the top pattern, press .
Memo
* To delete the bottom pattern, press . • When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.

• When changing the direction in which the


pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns in
the red frame will automatically be grouped
as one repeating unit. Press to
change a repeated pattern back to one
single pattern. See the following section on
how to repeat one element of a repeated
pattern.

214
EDITING PATTERNS

■ Repeating One Element of a


c
Press .
Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element. This function allows you to design
complex repeated patterns.

a
Choose the direction in which the repeated
pattern will be cut.

* Press to cut horizontally.

* Press to cut vertically.

→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate


elements.

d
Use and to select the element to
repeat.

→ The pattern direction indicator will change


depending on the direction selected.
6
b
Use and to select the cut line.

Embroidery Edit

→ The cut line will move.

215
EDITING PATTERNS

e ■ Assigning Thread Marks


Repeat the selected element.
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align
f
Press to finish repeating. patterns when sewing a series. When sewing is
finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape of
an arrow will be sewn using the final thread. When
sewing a series of patterns, use the point of this
arrow for positioning the following designs to be
sewn.

Memo
• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,
thread marks can be sewn around the
perimeter of the pattern only.

a
Press

b
Press .

Note
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
• Each element can be edited separately in
the edit screen. See “Selecting combined
embroidery patterns” on page 222.

216
EDITING PATTERNS

After Editing
c
Press to select the thread mark to

a
be sewn. Press .

Memo
b
• When there are two or more elements, use If you want to sew the pattern immediately,
and or and to select a
pattern that you want to assign a thread press to call up the sewing screen.
mark(s) to.

d
Press .
6

Embroidery Edit

* Press to return to the embroidery edit screen.


* To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
the next pattern from this screen (see page 219).
* See page 165 for more information about sewing
patterns.

Memo
If you return to the edit screen after pressing

, press , then .

217
EDITING PATTERNS

■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns


Press to automatically change the sewing
order of colors in combined border embroidery
patterns so that the same color can be continuously
sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing
the sewing order manually.

Memo
• In combined stitch patterns that contain two
or more border patterns or other patterns
combined with border patterns, the sewing
order of only the border patterns is changed.
• When a group of two or more patterns using
border patterns is repeated, the sewing
order is changed so that the same color can
be sewn continuously in each pattern.

218
COMBINING PATTERNS

COMBINING PATTERNS

Editing Combined Patterns b


Use to view P.4, then select .

Example: Combining alphabet characters


with an embroidery pattern and
editing

a
Press to select an embroidery

pattern.

c
Press .

Embroidery Edit

219
COMBINING PATTERNS

d f
Press . Select and enter “Sewing”.

* After selecting , press to change the


character size to M, then enter the remaining
characters.

e
Press to enter the alphabet
characters.
→ The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the display.

g
Press .

h
Use to move the characters.

* With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,


drag the characters to move them.

220
COMBINING PATTERNS

i k
Press to change the layout of the When all editing is finished, press .
characters. Press .
* See page 207 for more information about changing
the layout.

j
Press to change the color of the
characters.
* See page 209 for more information about changing
the color.

* Press to enlarge the preview of the


embroidery pattern.

Embroidery Edit
Use to view any part of the
pattern that extends out of viewable display area.
* You can select, move or edit the patterns while in
size.

* Press to return to the original display.

221
COMBINING PATTERNS

■ Selecting combined embroidery


patterns Sewing Combined Patterns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
to select the pattern to be edited. If a order they were entered. In this example, the
USB mouse is connected, the pattern can be embroidery order will be as follows:
selected by clicking it. Move the mouse to position
the pointer over the desired pattern, and then click

the left mouse button. In addition, patterns can be
selected by directly touching the screen with your
finger or touch pen. Note
Follow the directions in “Sewing Embroidery
Memo Patterns” on page 166.
• Use to select patterns that are
overlapping and cannot be selected by
a
clicking them or by touching the screen. Embroider by following the

color order on the right side of the display.

→ When the design is finished, the [+] cursor will


move to the “Sewing” part of the pattern.

b
Embroider .

→ When “Sewing” is embroidered, the display returns


to the sewing screen.

222
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION


In the same way as embroidery patterns in Chapter 5, you can save and retrieve edited embroidery
patterns to and from the machine’s memory, a personal computer, or USB media. Refer to the relevant
sections in Chapter 5 on saving and retrieving embroidery patterns and follow the same procedures in
order to save and retrieve edited embroidery patterns.
See page 185 for more information about the MEMORY FUNCTION.

Embroidery Edit

223
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION

224
8
Chapter 7
Appendix

CARE AND MAINTENANCE ..............................................................226


Cleaning the LCD Screen ......................................................................................226
Cleaning the Machine Casing ................................................................................226
Cleaning the Race .................................................................................................226
Cleaning the Bobbin Case .....................................................................................227
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN .................................................................228
Screen Visibility is Low .........................................................................................228
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning ..............................................................................228
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................230

ERROR MESSAGES.............................................................................233
■ Alarm Sounds ................................................................................................................238

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................239

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE .................................240


Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ..................................................................240
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ....................................................................241
CARE AND MAINTENANCE

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.

f
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry
cloth. Do not use organic solvents or detergents.

Cleaning the Machine Casing


If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a
a
cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,
and then wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a
dry cloth. a Bobbin case

g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
Cleaning the Race to remove any lint and dust from the race
and its surrounding area.
If dust or bits of dirt collect in the race or bobbin * Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
case, the machine will not run well, and the
bobbin thread detection function may not operate.
Keep the machine clean for best results.

a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.

b
Turn the main power to OFF.
a

c
Remove the needle and the presser foot b
holder (see pages 37 through 39).
a Cleaning brush
d
Remove the flat bed attachment or the b Race
embroidery unit if either is attached.

e
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.

a Needle plate cover


→ The needle plate cover is removed.

226
CARE AND MAINTENANCE

h
Insert the bobbin case so that the projection
on the bobbin case aligns with the spring. Cleaning the Bobbin Case
Thread wax and dust easily collect around the
notch in the tension spring on the bobbin case,
resulting in an incorrect thread tension. Therefore,
the bobbin case should be cleaned as necessary
a
should tension problems arise.
When cleaning the bobbin case, use card stock or
another type of paper of similar thickness and
sturdiness in order to prevent pieces of paper
b tearing off and getting lodged in the bobbin case.

a
Follow steps “Cleaning the Race” on page
226.
b
b
Using a piece of paper of adequate
a
thickness and sturdiness, slide the paper
between the tension plate base and the
tension spring and also slide the paper
behind the notch of the spring to remove
a b any dirt or dust.

a Projection
b Spring

i
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover a
into the needle plate, and then slide the d
cover back on.
c
a b
d
e

a Tension plate base


b
c
Notch
Paper (e.g. business card type)
7
d Tension spring
Appendix
Note e Bobbin case projection (stopper)
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing Memo
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin Do not bend the tension spring. In addition, do
case (part code: XC3153-051 (green screw), not use anything other than recommended
XC8167-051 (pink screw)), contact your paper to clean the bobbin case.
nearest authorized retailer.
• Be sure that the bobbin case is correctly
c
installed. Otherwise, the needle may break. Use the included cleaning brush to remove
• If the needle plate has been removed it is any lint and dust from inside the bobbin
especially important to reinstall the needle case.
plate and tighten the screws prior to
d
installing the bobbin case. Reinsert the bobbin case and needle plate
cover assuming the bobbin case projection
(stopper) is touching the bracket spring.
(Follow steps h and i from the previous
section.)

227
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

Screen Visibility is Low Touch Panel is Malfunctioning


If the screen is difficult to see when you turn on If the screen does not respond correctly when you
the power, follow the steps below. touch a key (the machine does not perform the
operation or performs a different operation), follow
a
Press your finger anywhere on the screen. the steps below to make the proper adjustments.
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
a
main power switch to OFF and back to ON. Press your finger anywhere on the screen.
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
main power switch to OFF and back to ON.

→ BRIGHTNESS OF LCD is displayed.

→ BRIGHTNESS OF LCD is displayed.


b
Use the , keys to adjust the screen

b
until you can see it easily. Press the “Automatic Threading” button.

→ The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.

c
Turn the main power to OFF and back to
ON.

228
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

c
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch
the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.
* If the buzzer sounds one time after you press
number 5, the operation is finished. If the buzzer
sounds twice, there was an error. In this case, repeat
the steps above.

Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch the
screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil, pin,
or other sharp object. Do not press strongly
on the screen. Otherwise, damage may
result.

+1 +4

+5

+2 +3

d
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it
back to ON.

Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you
cannot do the adjustment, contact your
authorized retailer.

7
Appendix

229
TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
If you have a minor problem with your sewing machine, check the following solutions. If the solutions
suggested do not correct the problem, contact your authorized retailer. You can also press then

for advice about minor sewing problems during sewing. Press at any time to return to
the original screen.
Problem Cause Solution Page
Upper thread breaks Machine is not threaded correctly (used the Rethread the machine correctly. 29
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
Thread is knotted or tangled. Rethread upper and lower thread. 26, 29
Thread is too thick for the needle. Check needle and thread combinations. 41
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension. 50, 174
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread —
and remove it from the race, etc.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 39
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 39
There are scratches near the hole of the needle Replace the needle plate, or consult your 65
plate. authorized retailer.
There are scratches near the hole in the presser Replace the presser foot, or consult your 37
foot. authorized retailer.
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized 226
retailer.
Bobbin thread breaks Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 26
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t Replace the bobbin. 26
rotate properly.
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread —
and remove it from the race, etc.
Skipped stitches Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine 29
and rethread it correctly.
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle 41
selected fabric. Combination” chart.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 39
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 39
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 39
Dust or lint has collected under the needle plate. Remove the dust or lint with the brush. 226
Fabric puckers There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin Check the steps for threading the machine 26, 29
threading. and rethread it correctly.
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap, 29
then reattach the spool cap.
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle 41
selected fabric. Combination” chart.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 39
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. 49
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 50, 174
Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot. 243
High-pitched sound Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. 226
while sewing Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. 226
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine 29
and rethread the machine.
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized 226
retailer.
Cannot thread the Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle Position” button to raise the 3
needle needle.
Threading hook does not pass through the eye Press the “Needle Position” button to raise the 3
of the needle. needle.
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 39

230
TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Solution Page


Cannot lower the Presser foot was raised using the “Presser Foot Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower 3
presser foot with the Lifter” button. the presser foot.
presser foot lever
Thread tension is Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine 29
incorrect and rethread the machine.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was 26
removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten
screws prior to installing bobbin case.)
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle 41
selected fabric. Combination” chart.
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. 38
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 50, 174
Character pattern Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot. 243
does not turn out Pattern adjustment settings were set incorrectly. Revise the pattern adjustment settings. 121
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics Attach a stabilizer material. 120
or stretch fabrics.
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 50, 174
Embroidery pattern Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread —
does not sew out and remove it from the race, etc.
correctly Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame, 159
(fabric was loose, etc.). the pattern may turn out poorly or there may
be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric into
the frame correctly.
Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially 157
with stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics
with a coarse weave, or fabrics that often
cause pattern shrinkage. See your authorized
retailer for the proper stabilizer.
There was an object placed near the machine, If the frame bumps something during sewing, 165
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
object during sewing. anything in the area where the frame may
bump it during sewing.
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so 159
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot that the excess fabric is away from the sewing
move. arm, and rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit Place the machine on a large enough table to —
cannot move freely. support the weight of the fabric being
embroidered.
Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during 165
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
7
Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that —

Appendix
it does not get caught or snagged.
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing If the presser foot is bumped or the 170
(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the
foot was bumped or moved while removing or pattern will not turn out. Be careful when
attaching the embroidery frame, or the removing or reattaching the embroidery frame
embroidery unit was moved. during sewing.

231
TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Solution Page


Needle breaks Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 39
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. 40
Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. 39
Using improper needle or thread for the Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle 41
selected fabric. Combination” chart.
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot. 243
Upper thread tension is too strong. Adjust the thread tension setting. 50, 174
Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap, 29
then reattach the spool cap.
There are scratches around the holes in the Replace the needle plate, or consult your 65
needle plate. authorized retailer.
There are scratches around the hole(s) in the Replace the presser foot, or consult your 37
presser foot. authorized retailer.
There are scratches on the race. Replace the race, or consult your authorized 226
retailer.
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 39
Fabric does not feed Feed dogs are set in the down position. Use the feed dog position lever to raise the 85
through the machine feed dogs.
Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. 49
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot. 243
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 39
Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from —
the race.
Machine does not There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. 59, 116, 149, 199
operate “Start/Stop” button was not pushed. Press the “Start/Stop” button. 3
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. 10
Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot. 3
“Start/Stop” button was pushed with the foot Remove the foot controller, or use the foot 45
controller attached. controller to operate the machine.
Speed control lever is set to control the zigzag Use the foot controller instead of the “Start/ 45
stitch width. Stop” button to operate the machine.
All keys and buttons have been locked by 37, 39
Press to unlock all keys and
.
buttons.
Embroidery unit does There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. 149, 199
not operate Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. 10
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly. 146
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit Perform the initialization process correctly. 146
was initialized.
LCD display is difficult LCD contrast is not properly adjusted. Adjust the LCD contrast. 19, 228
to see
Nothing happens, The screen has been locked. Press either of the following keys to unlock the —
even if the LCD
display is pressed screen.

CAUTION
• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the
upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,
the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from that made during normal
sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.
• If the power is disconnected during sewing:
Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.
If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.

232
ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR MESSAGES
If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pressed, or if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an
error message is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the
message.
Below is an explanation of 55 error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do
the operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).

CAUTION
• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,
the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed if the


the motor locks due to tangled
thread or for other reasons is touched when
related to thread delivery.
an unusable embroidery card is
inserted.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


a button, such as the “Start/Stop” there is no stitch or embroidery
button, is pushed while the pattern selected and the “Start/
presser foot is raised. Stop” button or the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button is
pressed.

This message is displayed when


the upper thread is broken or not
This message is displayed when
the “Reverse/Reinforcement
7
threaded correctly, and the Stitch” button is pushed while the

Appendix
“Start/Stop” button or the embroidery unit is attached.
“Reverse/ Reinforcement Stitch”
button is pressed.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


you try to combine more than 71
the is touched patterns.

without an embroidery card


inserted.

233
ERROR MESSAGES

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the patterns you are editing take the embroidery unit is attached
up too much memory, or if you and the power is turned on with
are editing too many patterns for the needle in the down position.
the memory.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the “Start/Stop” button is pushed the buttonhole lever is up, a
to sew Utility stitches or buttonhole stitch is selected, and
Character/Decorative stitches the “Start/ Stop” button or
while the foot controller is “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch”
connected. (This message does button is pushed.
not appear when embroidering.)

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the “Start/ Stop” button is pushed there are too many characters
while the machine is in and the curved character
embroidery edit mode and a configuration is impossible.
pattern is being edited.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


a key on the LCD display is the machine is in embroidery
touched while the needle is in mode and the combined
the down position. character pattern is too large for
the embroidery frame. You can
rotate the pattern 90 degrees
and continue combining
characters.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the buttonhole lever is down, a the machine is in embroidery
stitch other than a buttonhole is mode, and the character pattern
selected, and the “Start/ Stop” combination is too large to fit in
button or the “Reverse/ the embroidery frame.
Reinforcement Stitch” button is
pushed.

234
ERROR MESSAGES

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the machine is in embroidery the bobbin is being wound, and
mode and the small frame is the motor locks because the
attached, and the selected thread is tangled, etc.
pattern does not fit in the small
frame.

This message is displayed when, This message is displayed when


with the machine in embroidery the bobbin thread is running out.
mode and the small embroidery
frame or medium embroidery
frame attached, the selected
pattern is larger than the
embroidery area of the medium
embroidery frame.

This message is displayed when, This message is displayed when


with the machine in embroidery the embroidery unit is initializing.
mode and the small embroidery
frame, medium embroidery
frame or large embroidery frame
attached, the selected pattern is
larger than the embroidery area
of the large embroidery frame.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the machine is in embroidery the memory is full and the stitch
mode and the embroidery unit or pattern cannot be saved.
tries to initialize while the
embroidery frame is attached.

7
Appendix

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the machine is ready to sew an the machine is retrieving a
embroidery pattern, and the previously saved pattern while in
“Start/Stop” button is pushed embroidery edit mode.
while the embroidery frame is
not attached.

235
ERROR MESSAGES

This message is displayed when, This message is displayed when


after selecting a pattern, the foot controller is pressed
while the embroidery unit is
, , , attached and machine is set up
for embroidering.
or is pressed and the

pattern is about to be deleted.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the speed control lever is set to there is a possibility that the data
control the zigzag stitch width, for the selected pattern is
and the “Start/ Stop” button is corrupted.
pushed. Use the foot controller
to operate the machine.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the machine is in embroidery edit
is pressed when
mode, and you try to use an
editing function when the pattern changing thread colors.
is not completely within the red
outline.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


you try to save a copyright the feed dogs are raised while
protected pattern to USB media/ the Embroidery or Embroidery
Computer. According to Edit screen is displayed.
copyright laws, patterns that are
illegal to reproduce or edit
cannot be saved to USB media
or computer. If this message
displays, save the pattern in the
machine’s memory.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


the machine is in twin needle
mode and a pattern that cannot either or is
be sewn with the twin needle is pressed when the feed dogs are
selected. lowered.
Some techniques require the
feed dogs to be lowered. Press

and continue.

236
ERROR MESSAGES

This message is displayed when This message is displayed while


the “Start/Stop” button is pushed the USB media is transmitting.
and the machine is in
embroidery mode, but the
embroidery unit is not attached.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


you try to recall or save a pattern the memory is full and a pattern
while no USB media is loaded. must be deleted.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


you try to use incompatible the “Presser Foot Lifter” button is
media. pushed while the presser foot
lever is raised/the needle is
lowered.

This message is displayed when This message is displayed if


you attempt to select a pattern some malfunction occurs.
after the USB media in which the
pattern is saved has been
changed.

7
Appendix

This message is displayed when This message is displayed when


an error occurs with the USB you try to sew with a stitch other
media. than a middle needle position
stitch while the single-hole
needle plate is installed.
This message is displayed when
the needle plate is removed with
the machine on or when the
machine is turned on in the
embroidery or embroidery edit
mode.

237
ERROR MESSAGES

This message is displayed when


This message is displayed when the automatic needle threading
replacing the embroidering button is pushed while twin
bobbin thread. needle sewing is set.

This confirmation message


This message is displayed when appears after the machine is
rotating a saved combined turned on and the carriage of the
pattern in the Embroidery embroidery unit has moved to its
screen. initial position.

This message is displayed when ■ Alarm Sounds


you try to use incompatible USB If the operation procedure was correct, the machine
media.
will beep once. If the operation procedure was
incorrect, the machine will beep twice or four times.

Memo
If you want to turn the alarm off, press
. See page 16 for more details.

This message is displayed when


it seems that the upper thread
has not been threaded correctly.

This message is displayed when

is pressed (the
presser foot is raised).

238
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Sewing Machine Dimensions 55.6 cm (W) × 30.5 cm (H) × 25.8 cm (D) (approx.
21-7/8 inches (W) × 12 inches (H) × 10-1/8 inches (D))
Case Dimensions 58.2 cm (W) × 31.9 cm (H) × 28.4 cm (D) (approx.
22-7/8 inches (W) × 12-1/2 inches (H) × 11-1/8 inches (D))
Weight 12 kg (27 lb.) (with case: 14.3 kg (32 lb.))
Sewing speed 70 to 1000 stitches per minute
Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Embroidery Unit Dimensions 45.8 cm (W) × 13.1 cm (H) × 46.2 cm (D) (approx.
18 inches (W) × 5-1/8 inches (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with 72.4 cm (W) × 30.5 cm (H) × 46.2 cm (D) (approx.
embroidery unit attached 28-1/2 inches (W) × 12 inches (H) × 18-1/4 inches (D))
Weight 3.6 kg (8 lb.)

7
Appendix

239
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE


You can use USB media or a computer to download software upgrades for your sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on www.babylock.com, please download the files following the
instructions on the web site and steps below.
Memo
• When the machine’s software is upgraded, saved combinations of character and decorative stitches
are erased.
• During the process of upgrading software, the buzzer will not sound when a key is pressed.

c
Insert the USB media into the USB port
Upgrade Procedure Using USB connector on the machine, making sure the
media only contains the upgrade file.
Media
d
Press .
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON. → The message “Saving the upgrade file. Do not turn
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD. main power to OFF.” appears.

b
Press .

→ The upgrade file is downloaded.

Note
If an error occurs, a red text error message will
appear. If the download is performed
successfully, an “Upgrade complete.”
message will appear.

e
Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.

240
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

e
When the message disappears, press
Upgrade Procedure Using
Computer .

a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.

b
Press .

→ The upgrade file is downloaded.

Note
If an error occurs, a red text error message will
appear. If the download is performed
successfully, an “Upgrade complete.”
message will appear.

f
Unplug the USB cable, and turn the
c
Plug the USB cable connector into the
machine off and on again.
corresponding USB port connectors for the
computer and for the machine.
→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “My Computer”.

d
Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.

7
Appendix

→ The “Connected to PC. Do not disconnect the USB


cable.” message will appear.

241
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE

242
STITCH SETTING CHART

STITCH SETTING CHART


The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch
widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.
Stitch width Stitch length
Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,


(Left) etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/Reinforcement (0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Stitch” button.
Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,
(Left) etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
while pressing “Reverse/ (0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,
(Middle) etc. Reverse stitch is sewn while 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/Reinforcement (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Stitch” button.
Straight stitch General sewing, gather, pintuck,
(Middle) etc. Reinforcement stitch is sewn 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 5.0 OK
while pressing “Reverse/ (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
Triple stretch General sewing for reinforcement
stitch and decorative topstitching 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing and


decorative applications 1.0 1.0 - 3.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Decorative Decorative stitching, top stitching


stitch 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Basting stitch Basting 5.0 - 30.0


0.0 0.0 - 7.0 20.0
(3/16 - 1-3/ NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/4)
16)
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending. Reverse
stitch is sewn while pressing 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0 OK
“Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
button.
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reinforcement stitch is sewn while 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0 OK
pressing “Reverse/Reinforcement (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16) (J)
Stitch” button.
Zigzag stitch Start from right needle position,
(right) zigzag sew at left. 3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 4.0 OK
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

Zigzag stitch Start from left needle position,


(left) zigzag sew at right. 3.5 2.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.3 - 4.0 OK
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

2 step elastic Overcasting (medium weight and


zigzag stretch fabrics), tape and elastic 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

2 step elastic Overcasting (medium weight and


zigzag stretch fabrics), tape and elastic 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

3 step elastic Overcasting (medium,


zigzag heavyweight and stretch fabrics), 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
tape and elastic (3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

243
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Overcasting Reinforcing of light and medium


3.5 2.5 - 5.0 2.0 1.0 - 4.0
stitch weight fabrics NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Overcasting Reinforcing of heavyweight fabric


5.0 2.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
stitch NO
(3/16) (3/32 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Overcasting Reinforcing of medium,


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
stitch heavyweight and easily frayable NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)
fabrics or decorative stitching.
Overcasting Reinforced seaming of stretch
stitch fabric 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 9/32) (3/32) (1/32 - 3/16) (J)

Overcasting Reinforcing of medium stretch


stitch fabric and heavyweight fabric, 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.5 - 4.0 OK
decorative stitching (3/16) (0 - 9/32) (3/32) (1/32 - 3/16) (J)

Overcasting Reinforcement of stretch fabric or


stitch decorative stitching 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Overcasting Stretch knit seam


stitch 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 4.0 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Single diamond Reinforcement and seaming 6.0


overcast stretch fabric 1.0 - 7.0 3.0 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Single diamond Reinforcement of stretch fabric 6.0
overcast 1.0 - 7.0 1.8 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting fabrics
0.0 0.0 - 2.5 2.5 0.2 - 5.0
NO
(0) (0 - 3/32) (3/32) (1/64 - 3/16)

With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting fabrics


3.5 3.5 - 5.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


3.5 3.5 - 5.0 2.0 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(1/8) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

With side cutter Overcasting stitch while cutting


5.0 3.5 - 5.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork


(Right) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right 5.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (7/32) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork


(Middle) 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
— — NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Piecing stitch Piecework/patchwork


(Left) 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left 1.5 0.0 - 7.0 2.0 0.2 - 5.0
NO
seam allowance (1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Hand-look Quilting stitch made to look like


quilting hand quilting stitch 0.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(0) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Quilting Zigzag stitch for quilting and


appliqué zigzag sewing on appliqué quilt pieces 3.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 0.0 - 4.0
NO
stitch (1/8) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (0 - 3/16)

244
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Quilting Quilting stitch for invisible appliqué


appliqué stitch or attaching binding 1.5 0.5 - 5.0 1.8 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Quilting Background quilting


stippling 7.0 1.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/4) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics


0.0 2.0 1.0 - 3.5
3← - →3 NO
(0) (1/16) (1/16 - 1/8)

Blind hem stitch Hemming stretch fabric


0.0 2.0 1.0 - 3.5
stretch 3← - →3 NO
(0) (1/16) (1/16 - 1/8)

Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket


stitch 3.5 2.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.6 - 4.0 OK
(1/8) (3/32 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on fabrics


4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

Satin scallop Decorating collar of blouse, edge


stitch of handkerchief 5.0 2.5 - 7.0 0.5 0.1 - 1.0 OK
(3/16) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

Scallop stitch Decorating collar of blouse, edge


of handkerchief 7.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.4 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/4) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Patchwork join Patchwork stitches, decorative


stitch stitching 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.2 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(1/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

Patchwork Patchwork stitches, decorative


double overlock stitching 5.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
stitch (3/16) (3/32 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching cord


and couching 5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.2 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16) (J)

Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative stitching


5.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching


5.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Fagoting cross Fagoting, bridging and decorative


stitch stitching 5.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (3/32 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in stretch


fabric 4.0 0.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/61 - 3/16) (J)

Ladder stitch Decorative stitching


4.0 0.0 - 7.0 3.0 2.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)

Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching


4.0 0.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Decorative Decorative stitching


stitch 1.0 1.0 - 3.0 2.5 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

245
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Decorative Decorative stitching


stitch 5.5 0.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (0 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Serpentine Decorative stitching and attaching


stitch elastic 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)

Decorative Decorative stitching and appliqué 6.0


stitch 1.0 - 7.0 1.0 0.2 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Decorative Decorative stitching
stippling stitch 7.0 1.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(1/4) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple straight at


left 1.0 1.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple straight at


center 3.5 1.0 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(1/8) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Decorative hems, top stitching 6.0


zigzag 1.5 - 7.0 3.0 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, lace attaching
pin stitch 3.5 1.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.6 - 4.0
NO
(1/8) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Decorative hems


3.0 1.5 - 7.0 3.5 1.6 - 4.0
NO
(1/8) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Decorative hems daisy stitch 6.0


1.5 - 7.0 3.0 1.5 - 4.0
(15/ NO
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)
64)
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 3.5 1.6 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 3.5 1.5 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 3.5 1.6 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 4.0 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems


4.0 1.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Honeycomb Heirloom, decorative hems


stitch 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/64) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Honeycomb Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0


stitch 1.5 - 7.0 3.5 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0
1.5 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)

246
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0


1.5 - 7.0 3.0 1.5 - 4.0
(15/ NO
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16)
64)
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0
1.5 - 7.0 4.0 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (3/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
4.0 1.5 - 7.0 2.5 1.6 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (3/32) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 2.0 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging 6.0


stitch 1.5 - 7.0 2.0 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(15/
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)
64)
Hemstitching Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 3.0 1.5 - 4.0 OK
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/8) (1/16 - 3/16) (J)

Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking 6.0


1.5 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
(15/ NO
(1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)
64)
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Hemstitching Decorative hems


5.0 1.5 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 4.0
NO
(3/16) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/16)

Ladder stitch Decorative hems. Fagoting,


attaching ribbon 7.0 5.0 - 7.0 1.6 1.0 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/16 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/16 - 3/32)

Narrow rounded Buttonhole on light to medium


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Wide round Buttonholes with extra space for


5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
ended larger buttons NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
buttonhole
Tapered round Reinforced waist tapered
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
ended buttonholes NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
buttonhole
Round ended Buttonholes with vertical bar tack
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole in heavyweight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Round ended Buttonholes with bar tack


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Round double Buttonholes for fine, medium to


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
ended heavyweight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)
buttonhole
Narrow squared Buttonholes for light to medium
5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics NO
(3/16) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Wide squared Buttonholes with extra space for


5.5 3.5 - 5.5 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole larger decorative buttons NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 7/32) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

247
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Squared Heavy-duty buttonholes with


5.0 3.0 - 5.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
buttonhole vertical bar tacks NO
(7/32) (1/8 - 3/16) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Stretch Buttonholes for stretch or woven 6.0


3.0 - 6.0 1.0 0.5 - 2.0
buttonhole fabrics (15/ NO
(1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/32 - 1/16)
64)
Heirloom Buttonholes for heirloom and 6.0
3.0 - 6.0 1.5 1.0 - 3.0
buttonhole stretch fabrics (15/ NO
(1/8 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/1 - 1/8)
64)
Bound The first step in making bound
5.0 0.0 - 6.0 2.0 0.2 - 4.0
buttonhole buttonholes NO
(3/16) (0 - 15/64) (1/16) (1/64 - 3/16)

Keyhole Buttonholes in heavyweight or


7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
buttonhole thick fabrics for larger flat buttons NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)

Tapered keyhole Buttonholes in medium to heavy


7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
buttonhole weight fabrics for larger flat buttons NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)

Keyhole Buttonholes with vertical bar tack


7.0 3.0 - 7.0 0.5 0.3 - 1.0
buttonhole for reinforcement in heavyweight or NO
(1/4) (1/8 - 1/4) (1/32) (1/64 - 1/16)
thick fabrics
4 step Left side of 4 step buttonhole
buttonhole 1 (Forward stitching) 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

4 step Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole


buttonhole 2 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

4 step Right side of 4 step buttonhole


buttonhole 3 (Reverse stitching) 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

4 step Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole


buttonhole 4 5.0 1.5 - 7.0 0.4 0.2 - 1.0
NO
(7/32) (1/16 - 1/4) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Darning Darning of medium weight fabric


7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16)

Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric


7.0 2.5 - 7.0 2.0 0.4 - 2.5
NO
(1/4) (3/32 - 1/4) (1/16) (1/64 - 1/16)

Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of


2.0 1.0 - 3.0 0.4 0.3 - 1.0
pocket, etc. NO
(1/16) (1/16 - 1/8) (1/64) (1/64 - 1/16)

Button sewing Attaching buttons


3.5 2.5 - 4.5
— — NO
(1/8) (3/32 - 3/16)

Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on belts, 7.0 6.0 5.0 7.0 6.0 5.0
etc. 7.0 7.0
(1/4 15/64 3/ (1/4 15/64 NO
(1/4) (1/4)
16) 3/16)
Star eyelet For making star-shaped eyelets on
holes. — — — — NO

Diagonally left For attaching appliqué on tubular


up (Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Reverse For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

248
STITCH SETTING CHART

Stitch width Stitch length


Presser foot
[mm (inch.)] [mm (inch.)] Twin
Stitch Stitch name Applications
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual

Diagonally right For attaching appliqué on tubular


up (Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Sideways to left For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Straight) pieces of fabric — — — — NO

Sideways to For attaching appliqué on tubular


right (Straight) pieces of fabric — — — — NO

Diagonally left For attaching appliqué on tubular


down (Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Forward For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Diagonally right For attaching appliqué on tubular


down (Straight) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Sideways to left For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Zigzag) pieces of fabric — — — — NO

Sideways to For attaching appliqué on tubular


right (Zigzag) pieces of fabric — — — — NO

Forward For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Zigzag) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

Reverse For attaching appliqué on tubular


(Zigzag) pieces of fabric and mitering — — — — NO
corners

249
Index

Index
A Combining Patterns
character/decorative stitches ...................................................128
Accessories embroidery edit .......................................................................219
included accessories ................................................................... 4 Cord guide bobbin cover ..............................................................72
options ....................................................................................... 7 Crazy quilt ....................................................................................72
Accessory compartment ................................................................. 4 Custom Thread Table ......................................................... 210, 212
Adjustments Cut/Tension key ..........................................................................174
screen ..................................................................................... 228
screen brightness ............................................................. 19, 228
stitch pattern ........................................................................... 121
D
Air vent .......................................................................................... 1 Darning ......................................................................................103
Alarm sounds ............................................................................. 238 Dart seam .....................................................................................67
Alphabet characters Density key .................................................................................183
character/decorative stitches ................................................... 118
embroidery ............................................................................. 152
embroidery edit ...................................................................... 200
E
Appliqué ...................................................................................... 90 echo quilting .................................................................................86
embroidery patterns ................................................................ 168 Edit end key ................................................................................217
quilting ..................................................................................... 81 Editing
using a zigzag stitch .................................................................. 71 character/decorative stitches ...................................................123
using an embroidery frame pattern ......................................... 194 embroidery .............................................................................179
Array key ........................................................................... 201, 207 embroidery edit .......................................................................203
Arrow keys ................................................................179, 205, 220 Elastic zigzag stitches ....................................................................73
automatic fabric sensor system ..................................................... 55 Elongation key ............................................................................125
Automatic reinforcement stitch key .............................................. 51 Embroidery
Automatic thread cutting key ........................................................ 52 adjusting the speed .................................................................176
Automatic Threading button .................................................... 3, 29 automatic thread cutting function ............................................175
automatically resuming ...........................................................172
B edges or corners ......................................................................160
key functions ...........................................................................156
Back to beginning key ................................................................ 126 manually resuming ..................................................................173
Bar tacks ..................................................................................... 105 restarting from the beginning ...................................................171
Basting ......................................................................................... 67 ribbons or tape ........................................................................161
Blind hem stitches ........................................................................ 89 selecting patterns ....................................................................149
Bobbin small fabrics ............................................................................160
pulling up the bobbin thread .................................................... 28 thread color display ................................................................177
runs out of thread ................................................................... 170 thread trimming function .........................................................175
setting ....................................................................................... 26 Embroidery card .........................................................................154
winding .................................................................................... 23 Embroidery card slot .......................................................................1
Bobbin case (green screw, pink screw) .............................. 165, 226 Embroidery edit
Bobbin cover ........................................................................... 2, 26 changing the thread color .......................................................209
Bobbin holder (switch) ................................................................. 25 combined patterns ......................................................... 219, 222
Bobbin winder ................................................................................ 1 custom thread table ........................................................ 210, 212
Border key ......................................................................... 213, 216 explanation of functions ..........................................................198
Button sewing ............................................................................. 107 key functions ...........................................................................204
4 hole buttons ......................................................................... 108 repeated patterns .....................................................................213
shank ...................................................................................... 108 Embroidery foot “W” ..................................................................145
Buttonhole lever ..............................................................2, 99, 104 Embroidery foot height ......................................................... 18, 157
Buttonholes Embroidery frame display ...........................................................178
four-step ................................................................................. 101 Embroidery frames
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate ...... 100 attaching .................................................................................162
one-step .................................................................................... 97 inserting fabric ........................................................................159
removing .................................................................................162
C types .......................................................................................158
using the embroidery sheet .....................................................160
Character spacing key ................................................................ 207 Embroidery needle plate cover ....................................................165
Character/Decorative Stitches Embroidery patterns
adjustments ............................................................................ 121 checking the position ..............................................................163
combining .............................................................................. 128 combining ...............................................................................219
editing .................................................................................... 123 editing .....................................................................................203
key functions .......................................................................... 123 pattern selection screens .........................................................150
retrieving ...............................................................140, 141, 142 patterns which use appliqué ....................................................168
saving ....................................................................136, 138, 139 retrieving ........................................................................ 191, 192
selecting ................................................................................. 116 revising ...................................................................................179
sewing .................................................................................... 120 saving ................................................................... 187, 189, 190
stitch selection screens ........................................................... 117 selecting ......................................................................... 149, 199
Cleaning sewing ....................................................................................165
LCD screen ............................................................................. 226 using a frame pattern to make an appliqué ..................... 194, 195
machine casing ....................................................................... 226 Embroidery sheet ........................................................................160
race ........................................................................................ 226 Embroidery unit ..................................................................... 3, 146

250
Index

carriage .......................................................................................3 N
carrying case ...............................................................................4
release button .................................................................... 3, 148 Needle
Error messages ............................................................................233 changing the needle ................................................................. 39
Eyelet ..........................................................................................109 changing the needle position .................................................... 65
fabric/thread/needle combinations ............................................ 41
mode ........................................................................................ 11
F twin needle .............................................................................. 34
Fabrics Needle bar thread guides .................................................. 2, 33, 34
fabric/thread/needle combinations ............................................41 Needle clamp screw ....................................................................... 2
sewing heavyweight fabrics .......................................................47 Needle mode selection key .......................................................... 34
sewing lightweight fabrics .........................................................48 Needle plate ................................................................................... 2
sewing stretch fabrics ....................................................... 48, 100 Needle position ............................................................................ 65
Fagoting ........................................................................................93 Needle Position button ................................................................... 3
Feed dog position switch ............................................1, 3, 85, 107
Feed dogs ....................................................................... 2, 83, 107 O
Flat bed attachment ............................................................... 1, 146
Flat fell Seam ................................................................................69 ON/OFF button ........................................................................1, 10
Foot controller ......................................................................... 1, 45 Operation buttons ......................................................................1, 3
Forward/Back key .............................................................. 171, 173 Overcasting ..................................................................... 71, 73, 74
Frame-securing lever .............................................................. 3, 162
free-motion quilting P
free-motion echo quilting foot “E” .............................................86
free-motion open toe quilting foot “O” ......................................85 Patchwork .................................................................................... 72
free-motion quilting foot “C” .....................................................83 Pattern explanation key ................................................................ 22
free-motion sewing mode .............................................................83 Piecing ......................................................................................... 80
Pintuck ......................................................................................... 69
pivoting ........................................................................................ 53
G Power cord ................................................................................... 10
Gathering ......................................................................................68 Power cord receptacle ..............................................................1, 10
Presser foot
attaching .................................................................................. 37
H pressure .................................................................................... 55
Handle ............................................................................................1 removing .................................................................................. 37
Handwheel .............................................................................. 1, 31 types ....................................................................................... 243
Hard case .......................................................................................6 Presser foot code ..................................................................11, 155
Heirloom ......................................................................................95 Presser foot holder ....................................................................2, 37
Hemstitching Presser foot holder screw ................................................................ 2
daisy stitch ................................................................................95 Presser foot lever ......................................................................1, 47
drawn work ...............................................................................96 Presser Foot Lifter button ................................................................ 3
Presser foot/Needle exchange key ....................31, 34, 37, 39, 145
Pretension disk .................................................................. 1, 24, 26
I
Image key ................................................................... 59, 127, 164 Q
Quilting ........................................................................................ 79
K free-motion ............................................................................... 83
Key functions with satin stitches ..................................................................... 82
character/decorative stitches ...................................................123
embroidery .............................................................................156 R
embroidery edit .......................................................................204
utility stitches ............................................................................12 Race ........................................................................................... 226
Knee lifter ................................................................................ 1, 53 Repeated patterns ....................................................................... 213
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns ......................................... 140
L computer ........................................................................142, 192
Languages .....................................................................................20 embroidery patterns ................................................................ 191
LCD cover ................................................................................. 1, 7 machine’s memory .........................................................140, 191
LCD screen .............................................................................. 1, 11 stitch settings ............................................................................ 61
adjusting .................................................................................228 USB media .....................................................................141, 191
brightness ..................................................................................19 utility stitches ........................................................................... 61
cleaning ..................................................................................226 Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch button ................................. 3, 46, 51
locking ......................................................................................55 Reverse/Reinforcement stitches ..............................................46, 51
Lower threading Rotate key ..........................................................................182, 205
pulling up the bobbin thread .....................................................28
setting the bobbin .....................................................................26 S
winding the bobbin ...................................................................23
Satin stitches ........................................................................82, 126
Saving
M character/decorative stitches ................................................... 136
Machine operation mode key .............................................. 21, 230 computer ........................................................................139, 190
Main power switch .......................................................................10 embroidery patterns ................................................................ 187
Mirror image key ........................................................ 59, 125, 183 machine’s memory .........................................................136, 187
Multi color key .................................................................. 184, 209 stitch settings ............................................................................ 60
Multi-directional sewing .............................................................110 USB media .....................................................................138, 189

251
Index

utility stitches ............................................................................ 60 Upper threading


Scallop stitches ............................................................................. 92 threading manually ...................................................................31
Settings twin needle mode .....................................................................34
automatic reinforcement stitching ............................................. 51 using the “Automatic Threading” button ...................................29
automatic thread cutting ........................................................... 52 using the spool net ....................................................................36
display language ....................................................................... 20 using the vertical spool pin .......................................................36
embroidery settings ................................................................... 18 USB media
general settings ......................................................................... 17 recalling ......................................................................... 141, 191
machine setting mode key .......................................16, 176, 210 saving ............................................................................ 138, 189
screen brightness ...................................................................... 19 usable ............................................................................ 134, 185
sewing settings .......................................................................... 16 USB port connector
stitch length .............................................................................. 49 for computer ............................................................. 1, 139, 190
stitch width ............................................................................... 49 for media .................................................................. 1, 138, 189
thread tension .................................................................. 50, 174 Utility stitches
thread trimming ...................................................................... 175 key functions .............................................................................12
Sewing pattern explanation key .............................................................22
change direction ....................................................................... 46 retrieving ...................................................................................61
curves ................................................................................ 46, 72 saving .......................................................................................60
heavyweight fabrics .................................................................. 47 selecting ....................................................................................58
lightweight fabrics .................................................................... 48 sewing type selection key ..........................................................61
reinforcement stitches ............................................................... 46 stitch selection screens ..............................................................58
stretch fabrics ........................................................................... 48 stitch setting chart ...................................................................243
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide) ......................1, 3, 44
Sewing type selection key ............................................................. 61 V
Shelltuck stitches .......................................................................... 91
Side cutter .................................................................................... 76 Vertical spool pin ..........................................................................36
Single/Repeat sewing key ........................................................... 125
Size key ............................................................................. 181, 206 W
Size selection key ....................................................................... 124
Smocking stitches ......................................................................... 93 Walking foot .................................................................................38
Specifications ............................................................................. 239
Spool cap ....................................................................................... 1 Z
Spool net ...................................................................................... 36
Spool pin ................................................................................. 1, 25 Zigzag stitches ..............................................................................71
Stabilizer .................................................................................... 157 Zipper insertion
Start/Stop button ............................................................................. 3 centered ..................................................................................111
Starting point key ........................................................................ 180 side .........................................................................................112
Step stitch patterns ...................................................................... 132
Stitch length ................................................................................. 49
Stitch selection screens ........................................................ 58, 117
Stitch setting chart ...................................................................... 243
Stitch width .................................................................................. 49
Straight stitch foot ......................................................................... 65
Straight stitch needle plate ............................................................ 65
Straight stitches ............................................................................. 63
Supplemental spool pin .....................................................1, 23, 34

T
Tape attaching .............................................................................. 73
Tape or elastic attaching ............................................................... 94
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations ............................................ 41
thread tension .................................................................. 50, 174
Thread color display ................................................................... 177
Thread cutter ........................................................................... 1, 45
Thread Cutter button ...................................................................... 3
Thread density key ..................................................................... 126
Thread guide .............................................................. 1, 24, 26, 35
Thread guide plate .............................................................1, 26, 29
Thread marks .............................................................................. 216
Thread palette key ............................................................. 209, 212
Thread trimming ......................................................................... 175
Threading manually ...................................................................... 31
Top cover ....................................................................................... 1
Top stitching ................................................................................. 92
Touch pen ......................................................................... 210, 229
holder ......................................................................................... 1
Trial key ..................................................................................... 163
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 230
Twin needle ................................................................................. 34

U
Upgrading .................................................................................. 240

252
Index

253
English
882-S95
XE2542-001
Printed in Taiwan

You might also like